Pioneer Vsx 919Ah K Users Manual XRB3109A

If not then VSX-1019AH-K_OperatingInstructions0128 Manual: ://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ephox/StaticFiles/Manuals/Home/VSX-1019AH-K_OperatingInstructions0128

VSX-919AH-K to the manual 1f1f3ab9-2aa9-4563-9a74-93f138720ae6

2015-01-26

: Pioneer Pioneer-Vsx-919Ah-K-Users-Manual-334939 pioneer-vsx-919ah-k-users-manual-334939 pioneer pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 128

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 1 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL
RECEIVER

VSX-1019AH-K
VSX-919AH-K

http://www.pioneerelectronics.com (US)
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca (Canada)
· Protect your new investment
The details of your purchase will be on file for reference in the event of an
insurance claim such as loss or theft.

· Receive free tips, updates and service bulletins on
your new product
· Improve product development
Your input helps us continue to design products that meet your needs.

· Receive a free Pioneer newsletter
Registered customers can opt in to receive a monthly newsletter.

Operating Instructions

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 2 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
D3-4-2-1-3_B_En
or moisture.

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
or 120 V) written on the rear panel.
This product contains mercury. Disposal of this
material may be regulated due to environmental
considerations. For disposal or recycling information,
please contact your local authorities or the Electronics
K057_En
Industries Alliance : www.eiae.org.

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
on vacation).

WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or
cords associated with accessories sold with the
product will expose you to chemicals listed on
proposition 65 known to the State of California and
other governmental entities to cause cancer and
birth defect or other reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling
D36-P4_A_En

IMPORTANT NOTICE – THE SERIAL NUMBER FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS LOCATED IN THE REAR.
PLEASE WRITE THIS SERIAL NUMBER ON YOUR ENCLOSED WARRANTY CARD AND
D1-4-2-6-1_En
KEEP IN A SECURE AREA. THIS IS FOR YOUR SECURITY.

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
–
–
–
–

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
D8-10-1-2_En
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

D8-10-1-3_EF

Information to User
Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate
the equipment.
D8-10-2_En

CAUTION: This product satisfies FCC regulations when shielded cables and connectors are used to connect the
unit to other equipment. To prevent electromagnetic interference with electric appliances such as radios and
D8-10-3a_En
televisions, use shielded cables and connectors for connections.
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Product Name:
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER
Model Number:
VSX-1019AH-K, VSX-919AH-K
Responsible Party Name:
PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE INC.
Address:
1925 E. DOMINGUEZ ST. LONG BEACH, CA 90801-1760, USA
Phone:
1-800-421-1404

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 3 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

IMPORTANT

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.

CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8) Do not install near any heat sources such as
radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus
(including amplifiers) that produce heat.
9) Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two
blades with one wider than the other. A grounding
type plug has two blades and a third grounding
prong. The wide blade or the third prong are
provided for your safety. If the provided plug does
not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10) Protect the power cord from being walked on or
pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit from the
apparatus.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)

The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A

11) Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12) Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or
table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the
apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when
moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid
injury from tip-over.

13) Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or
when unused for long periods of time.
14) Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been
damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or
plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects
have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has
been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate
normally, or has been dropped.
P1-4-2-2_En

VENTILATION CAUTION

WARNING

When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
30 cm at each side).

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
equipment.

WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
equipment on thick carpet or a bed.

Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC to +35 ºC (+41 ºF to +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
strong artificial light)
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
K041_En
warranty period.

CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
(for example, when on vacation).
CAUTION
To prevent fire hazard, the
Class 2 Wiring Cable
should be used for
connection with speaker,
and should be routed
away from hazards to
avoid damage to the
insulation of the cable.

For U.S. and Australia Model

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 4 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.

Contents
01 Before you start
Checking what’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

02 Controls and displays
Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating range of remote control unit. . . . . 13

Connecting a component to the front
panel inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

04 Basic Setup
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . 36
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Input function default and possible settings . . . 40

03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Determining the speakers’ application . . . . . . 15
Other speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . 17
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bi-amping your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Selecting the Surr Back system . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Zone 2 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
About the audio connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting your TV and playback
components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . 26
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder, VCR
and other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . 28
Connecting other audio components . . . . . . . 29
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting AM/FM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . 30
MULTI-ZONE setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operating other Pioneer components
with this unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting your SiriusConnect™ Tuner . . . . . 33

05 Basic playback
Playing a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . 42
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . 42
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod . . . 43
Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing back audio files stored on
a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing back photo files stored on
a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
About playable file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Using SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Listening to SIRIUS Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Saving channel presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the SIRIUS Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Listening to station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

06 Listening to your system
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . 54
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . 55
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using surround back channel processing . . . . 56
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode. . . . . 57
Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Better sound using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . 59

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 5 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Making receiver settings from
the System Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
ZONE Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Power ON Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Volume Limit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

08 Using other functions

09 Controlling the rest of your system

Español

Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fine Channel Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . 85
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . 86
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Acoustic Cal EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Clearing MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Nederlands

10 The Advanced MCACC menu

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Professional Calibration EQ graphical
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Important information regarding
the HDMI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
SIRIUS radio messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Surround sound formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . 113
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
About SIRIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
About Neural – THX Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with
different input signal formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Preset code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Deutsch

Operating multiple receivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting the remote to control
other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . 74
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

12 Additional information

Français

Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . 70
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . 71
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Italiano

11 The system and the other setup

Making the KURO LINK connections . . . . . . . 60
Cautions on the KURO LINK function. . . . . . 61
About connections with a product of
a different brand that supports
the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . 63
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . 63

English

07 KURO LINK

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 6 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Flow of settings on the receiver
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped
with an abundance of functions and terminals.
It can be used easily after following the
procedure below to make the connections and
settings.



Determining the speakers’ application
(page 15)
• 7.1ch surround connection
• 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping
connection
• 5.1ch surround & Zone 2 connection
• 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection


Connecting the speakers
• Placing the speakers (page 17)
• Connecting the speakers (page 18)
• Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections (page 19)
• Bi-amping your speakers (page 20)


Connecting the components
• About the audio connection (page 22)
• About the video converter (page 22)
• Connecting your TV and playback
components (page 23)
• Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 30)
• Plugging in the receiver (page 35)


Switching the speaker impedance
(page 36)
(Only if the impedance of the connected
speakers is 6 Ω to 8 Ω)


Power On

Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language) (page 36)

Surround back speaker setting (page
94)



6
En

Required setting item
Setting to be made as necessary



Before you start
• Checking what’s in the box (page 7)
• Loading the batteries (page 7)

The colors of the steps indicate the following:

MCACC speaker settings
• Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) (page 37)


10 The Input Setup menu (page 39)
(When using connections other than the
recommended connections)


11 Basic playback (page 41)


12 Adjusting the sound and picture
quality as desired
• Using the various listening modes
• Using surround back channel processing
(page 56)
• Better sound using Phase Control (page 59)
• Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration
EQ, Sound retriever or Dialog Enhancement
(page 64)
• Change the channel level while listening
(Tip on page 97)
• Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL
CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 78)
• Setting the PQLS function (page 62)
• Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness
or Sound delay, etc.) (page 64)
• Setting the Video options (page 67)


13 Other optional adjustments and
settings
• KURO LINK Setup (page 62)
• The Advanced MCACC menu (page 77)
• The system and the other setup (page 93)


14 Making maximum use of the remote
control
• Operating multiple receivers (page 73)
• Setting the remote to control other
components (page 73)

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 7 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Before you start

Chapter 1:

Before you start
Checking what’s in the box

Loading the batteries

Please check that you’ve received the following
supplied accessories:
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m (16.4 ft.))
• Remote control unit
• AA size IEC R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm
system operation) x2
• AM loop antenna
• FM wire antenna
• iPod cable
• These operating instructions

Installing the receiver
• When installing this unit, make sure to put
it on a level and stable surface.
Don’t install it on the following places:
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that
gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere
with the sound.
– in direct sunlight
– in damp or wet areas
– in extremely hot or cold areas
– in places where there is vibration or other
movement
– in places that are very dusty
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as
a kitchen)
• Do not touch this receiver’s bottom panel
while the power is turned on. The bottom
panel gets hot when the power is on, and
touching it could cause burns.

CAUTION
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such
hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the
following precautions:
• Never use new and old batteries together.
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the
batteries properly according to the marks
in the battery case.
• Batteries with the same shape may have
different voltages. Do not use different
batteries together.
• When disposing of used batteries, please
comply with governmental regulations or
environmental public instruction’s rules
that apply in your country or area.
• WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct
sunlight or other excessively hot place,
such as inside a car or near a heater. This
can cause batteries to leak, overheat,
explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
(Symbol examples for batteries)
These symbols are only valid
in the European Union.
Pb

K058c_A1_En

7
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 8 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controls and displays

Chapter 2:

Controls and displays
Front panel
1

8
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER

STANDBY/ON

ENTER

BAND

TUNE

INPUT
SELECTOR

PHASE
CONTROL

AUTO SURR /ALC/
STREAM DIRECT

ADVANCED
MCACC

STEREO

ADVANCED
SURROUND

HDMI

STANDARD
SURROUND

SPEAKERS

USB

PRESET

TUNER EDIT

MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON / OFF

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MASTER
VOLUME

MCACC
SETUP MIC

PHONES

1 INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input function.

11 12

2  STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby.
Power indicator lights when the receiver is on.

8
En

Tuner controls
BAND – Switches between AM and FM
radio bands (page 51).
TUNE +/– – Use to find radio frequencies
(page 51).
PRESET +/– – Use to find preset stations
(page 52).
TUNER EDIT – Use with TUNE +/–, PRESET
+/– and ENTER to memorize and name
stations for recall (page 52).

PHASE CONTROL indicator – Lights to
indicate Phase Control is selected
(page 59).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator – Lights
when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO
PARAMETER menu.

When the KURO LINK function is set to ON,
the power indicator lights dimly when the
power is in standby.
3

HDMI indicator – Blinks when connecting
an HDMI-equipped component; lights when
the component is connected (page 23).
5 Character display
See Display on page 9.
6

ENTER

7 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control
(see Operating range of remote control unit on
page 13).
8

MASTER VOLUME dial

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 9 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controls and displays

9 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the
headphones are connected, there is no sound
output from the speakers.

11 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 69).
12 MULTI-ZONE controls
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see
MULTI-ZONE setup on page 31) use these
controls to control the sub zone from the main
zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on
page 69).

10 Listening mode buttons
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT –
Switches between Auto Surround (page 53),
Auto level control mode and Stream Direct
mode (page 56).
STEREO – Switches between stereo
playback, and Front Stage Surround
Advance modes (page 55).
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch
between the various surround modes
(page 54).
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for
Standard decoding and to switch between
the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6
options (page 53).

13 iPod/iPhone/USB, VIDEO INPUT
terminals
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio
and video source, or connect a USB device for
audio and photo playback (page 34, 35).
See Connecting a component to the front panel
inputs on page 34.
14 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone
(page 37).

Display
1
AUTO

PCM
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG

2
L
SL
XL

C
XC
LFE

R 2DIGITAL PLUS
2TrueHD WMA9Pro
SR DTS HD ES 96/24
XR
MSTR

AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT

CD
CD-R

TUNER

7 8

9 10 11 12

DSD PCM
TUNED
MULTI-ZONE PQLS ALC ATT STEREO
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO

SIRIUS
iPod

DVD TV
BD DVR

VIDEO
HDMI

16 17

USB
[2] [3] [4]

2PROLOGIC x Neo:6

ADV.SURROUND
STEREO STANDARD
SP AB
SLEEP

19 20 21

1 SIGNAL indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input
signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to
select the input signal automatically (page 58).
2 Program format indicators
Light to indicate the channels being input
when PCM signals are being input. They do not
indicate the audio signals being output from
the receiver.

L/R – Left front/Right front channel
C – Center channel
SL/SR – Left surround/Right surround channel
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the (( ))
indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)
XL/XR – Two channels other than the ones above
XC – Either one channel other than the ones above,
the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag

3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding
format is detected.

9
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 10 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controls and displays

4 S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is
active (page 65).
5 MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active
(page 69).
6

DSD PCM – Light during DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.
PCM – Lights during playback of PCM
signals.

7 SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or
tone controls feature is selected (page 64).
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.
8 PQLS
Lights when the PQLS feature is active (page 62).
9 UP MIX
Lights when the UP Mix is switched on (page 57).
10 Listening mode indicators
AUTO SURROUND – Lights when the Auto
Surround feature is switched on (page 53).
ALC – Lights when the ALC (Auto level
control) mode is selected (page 56).
STREAM DIRECT – Lights when Direct/
Pure Direct is selected (page 56).
ADV.SURROUND – Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been
selected (page 54).
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is
switched on (page 55).
STANDARD – Lights when one of the
Standard Surround modes is switched on
(page 53).
11
(PHASE CONTROL)
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on
(page 59).
12 Analog signal indicators
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog
signal (page 71).

10
En

13 Tuner indicators
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being
received.
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast
is being received in auto stereo mode.
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set
using MPX.
14
Lights when the sound is muted (page 13).
15 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level.
“---” indicates the minimum level, and “+12dB”
indicates the maximum level.
16 Input function indicators
Light to indicate the input function you have
selected.
17 Scroll indicators
Light when there are more selectable items
when making the various settings.
18 Matrix decoding format indicators
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate
2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding
(page 53).
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the
receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6
processing (page 53).
19 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system,
A and/or B (page 69).
20 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 71).
21 MSTR
Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master
Audio signal.
22 Character display
Displays various system information.
23 Remote control mode indicator
Lights to indicate the receiver’s remote control
mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)
(page 73)

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 11 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controls and displays

Remote control
12
RECEIVER

SOURCE

1
2

13
DVD

iPod USB TUNER

DVR

HDMI

CD-R

VIDEO

1  RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this
receiver.

INPUT
SELECT

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SLEEP

SBch

A.ATT

DIMMER

D.ACCESS

CH LEVEL

CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER
VOLUME

VOL

3 Number buttons and other receiver/
component controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a
radio frequency (page 51) or the tracks on a
CD, DVD, etc.

ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV
or DTV.

MUTE

AUDIO
PARAMETER

VIDEO
PARAMETER

TUNE

LIST

2 Input function buttons
Press to select control of other components (see
Controlling the rest of your system on page 73).

TV CONTROL

Press RECEIVER first to access:
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the input
function (page 41).

TOOLS

TOP MENU
BAND

T.EDIT
GUIDE

ENTER

PRESET

CATEGORY

SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal
(page 58).

RETURN
HOME
MENU

MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC
presets (page 58).

TUNE

iPod CTRL

DVD
PHASE CTRL

8
9

ANT

MPX

AUDIO

INFO

STATUS

PQLS

SBch – Use to select the surround back/virtual
surround back channel mode (page 56).

MEMORY

DISP
TV CTRL RECEIVER

SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep
mode and select the amount of time before
sleep (page 71).

AUTO/ALC/
MENU
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD

REMOTE
SETUP

MAIN

• White – Receiver control, TV Control
• Blue – Other controls

SIRIUS

The remote has been conveniently color-coded
according to component control using the
following system:

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

A.ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion
(page 71).
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display
(page 71).
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a
channel, then use / to adjust the level
(page 97).

11
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 12 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controls and displays

Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can
access a radio station directly using the
number buttons (page 51).
CLASS – Switches between the seven
banks (classes) of radio station presets
(page 52).
4 TV CONTROL buttons
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV
assigned to TV operation selector switch. Thus
if you only have one TV to hook up to this
system assign it to the TV operation selector
switch (see page 75 for more on this).
 – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
INPUT – Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/– – Use to select channels.
VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your
TV.
5 Tuner/component control buttons/HOME
MENU
These button controls can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input
function button (DVD, DVR, TV, etc.). The
BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls are explained
on page 51 and page 52.
Press RECEIVER first to access:
AUDIO PARAMETER – Use to access the
Audio options (page 64).
VIDEO PARAMETER – Use to access the
Video options (page 67).
HOME MENU – Use to access the Home
Menu (pages 36, 39, 62, 77, 93 and 98).
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the
current menu screen (also use to return to
the previous menu with DVDs or to select
closed captioning with DTV).

12
En

6 /// (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your
surround sound system (see page 77) and the
Audio or Video options (page 64 or 67). Also
used to control DVD menus/options and for
deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use
TUNE/ to find radio frequencies and use
PRESET / to find preset stations (page 52).
7 Receiver controls
Press RECEIVER first to access:
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT – Switches between
Auto Surround (page 53), Auto level control
mode and Stream Direct mode (page 56).
STEREO – Switches between stereo
playback, and Front Stage Surround
Advance modes (page 55).
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding
and to switch between the various 2 Pro
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 53).
ADV SURR – Use to switch between the
various surround modes (page 54).
8 Component control buttons
The main buttons (, , etc.) are used to
control a component after you have selected it
using the input function buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be
accessed after you have selected the
corresponding input function button (for
example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
Press TV first to access:
ANT – Use to select the VHF/UHF antennas
or Cable TV.
Press TUNER first to access:
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono
reception of FM broadcasts. If the signal is
weak, then switching to mono will improve
the sound quality (page 51).

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 13 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controls and displays

Press RECEIVER first to access:
PHASE CTRL – Press to switch on/off
Phase Control (page 59).

Operating range of remote control
unit
The remote control may not work properly if:

STATUS – Press to check selected receiver
settings (page 71).

• There are obstacles between the remote
control and the receiver’s remote sensor.

AUDIO – Changes the audio or channel on
DVD discs.
DISPLAY – Switches between named
station presets and radio frequencies.

• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is
shining onto the remote sensor.

CH +/– – Use to select channels for DVD/
DVR units.

• The receiver is operated simultaneously
with another infrared remote control unit.

10 REMOTE SETUP – Use to input the preset
code when making remote control settings
and to set the remote control mode
(page 73).
TV CTRL – Use this button to set preset
code of your TV’s manufacturer when
controlling TV (see Selecting preset codes
directly on page 73 for more on this).
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone
and sub zone (page 70).

• The receiver is located near a device that is
emitting infrared rays.

30°
30°

7 m (23 ft.)

12 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the
remote control (page 73).
13  SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components
connected to the receiver (see page 73 for
more on this).
14 MASTER VOLUME +/–
Use to set the listening volume.
15 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has
been muted (adjusting the volume also
restores the sound).
16 RECEIVER
Switches the remote to control the receiver
(used to select the white commands above the
number buttons (A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this
button to set up surround sound.

13
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 14 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Chapter 3:

Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This
page explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.

Rear panel
VSX-919AH

DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE
1 2

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

BD IN
AUDIO

IN 2

IN (DVD)

OUT

VSX-1019AH

FRONT

HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
1 3
COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD)
FRONT

OUT

PB R

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

OPTICAL

SIRIUS IN

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN 2 (DVR)
CENTER SURROUND

AM
LOOP

PRE OUT

IN 2

AUDIO

FM
UNBAL
75
ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MONITOR
OUT

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A

CENTER

SURROUND

ANTENNA
L

R SURROUND BACK / B L
(Single)

IN
IR

VIDEO

OUT
IN
CONTROL

OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Important
• Illustration shows the VSX-1019AH,
however connections for the VSX-919AH
are the same except where noted.

CAUTION
• Before making or changing the
connections, switch off the power and
disconnect the power cord from the power
outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables
over the top of the receiver.

14
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 15 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Determining the speakers’
application
Surround sound with a strong sense of
presence can be enjoyed by connecting 7
speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is also possible to
achieve high sound quality using bi-amp
connections and to enjoy music in other rooms
using the MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound
quality can be achieved with a minimum of two
speakers.
• Be sure to connect speakers to the front
left and right channels ( FL and FR ).
• The Surr Back System setting must be
made if you use any of the connections
shown below other than [1] (see Selecting
the Surr Back system on page 21).

[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping
connection (High quality surround)
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround
sound.
• Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp

SW
C

Front
left*

Front
right*

Center

Subwoofer
Surround
right

Surround
left

*Bi-amp compatible speaker

[1] 7.1ch surround connection
(Simple connection & Best surround)

[3] 5.1ch surround & Zone 2 connection
(Multi Zone)

*Default setting

With these connections you can simultaneously
enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
zone with stereo playback on another
component in Zone 2. (The selection of input
devices is limited.)

These connections prioritize surround sound
with a speaker layout like that in a movie theater.
• Surr Back System setting: Normal
(default)
• If you have six speakers, either only
connect one surround back speaker (6.1 ch
surround), or connect for the 7.1-channel
setting as shown on the diagram below but
without the center speaker.

• Surr Back System setting: Zone2

SW
C

Front
left

Front
right

Center

Subwoofer

SW
C

Front
left

Front
right

Center

Subwoofer

Surround
right

Surround
left

SL
Surround
left

Surround
right

SBL
Surround
back left

SBR
Surround
back right

Left

Right

ZONE2

15
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 16 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection
With these connections you can
simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround
sound in the main zone with stereo playback of
the same sound on the B speakers.
• Surr Back System setting: Speaker B

Front
left

C
Center

Front
right

Subwoofer
Surround
left

Surround
right

SR
Speaker B

16
En

Other speaker connection
• Your favorite speaker connections can be
selected even if you have fewer than 5.1
speakers.
• When not connecting a subwoofer, connect
speakers with low frequency reproduction
capabilities to the front channel. (The
subwoofer’s low frequency component is
played from the front speakers, so the
speakers could be damaged.)
• After connecting, be sure to conduct
the Auto MCACC (speaker environment
setting) procedure (page 37).

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 17 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Some tips for improving sound quality

Placing the speakers
To achieve the best possible surround sound,
install your speakers as shown below.
5.1 channel surround system:
Center

Front right

Front left
Subwoofer

120°

120°
Surround
right

Surround
left

6.1 channel surround system:
Center

Front left

Front right

Subwoofer

120°

Surround
left

Surround
right
Surround Back

7.1 channel surround system:
Center
Front right

Front left
Subwoofer
90°

90°
Surround
left
Surround back
left

Surround
right
60°

Surround back
right

Where you put your speakers in the room has a
big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the
best sound from your system.
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.
Ideally, the other speakers should be at
about ear-level when you’re listening to
them. Putting the speakers on the floor
(except the subwoofer), or mounting them
very high on a wall is not recommended.
• For the best stereo effect, place the front
speakers 2 m to 3 m (6 ft. to 9 ft.) apart, at
equal distance from the TV.
• If you’re using a center speaker, place the
front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
• Place the center speaker above or below
the TV so that the sound of the center
channel is localized at the TV screen. Also,
make sure the center speaker does not
cross the line formed by the leading edge
of the front left and right speakers.
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the
listening position. The angle depends on
the size of the room. Use less of an angle
for bigger rooms.
• Surround and surround back speakers
should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm (2 ft.
to 3 ft.) higher than your ears and tilted
slight downward. Make sure the speakers
don’t face each other. For DVD-Audio, the
speakers should be more directly behind
the listener than for home theater playback.
• If the surround speakers cannot be set
directly to the side of the listening position
with a 7.1-channel system, the surround
effect can be enhanced by turning off the
UP Mix function (see Setting the Up Mix
function on page 57).
• Try not to place the surround speakers
farther away from the listening position
than the front and center speakers. Doing
so can weaken the surround sound effect.

17
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 18 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver
comprises a positive (+) and negative (–)
terminal. Make sure to match these up with the
terminals on the speakers themselves.

• Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.
It is not possible to connect using speaker
cables.

CAUTION
• These speaker terminals carry
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent
the risk of electric shock when connecting
or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching
any uninsulated parts.
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is
twisted together and inserted fully into the
speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker
wire touches the back panel it may cause
the power to cut off as a safety measure.

Bare wire connections
1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
(fig. A)
2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
(fig. B)
3

Tighten terminal. (fig. C)
fig. A

fig. B

fig. C

10 mm (3/8 in.)

Banana plug connections
If you want to use speaker cables terminated
with banana plugs, screw the speaker terminal
fully shut, then plug the banana plug into the
end of the speaker terminal.

18
En

Important
• Please refer to the manual that came with
your speakers for details on how to connect
the other end of the speaker cables to your
speakers.

CAUTION
• Make sure that all speakers are securely
installed. This not only improves sound
quality, but also reduces the risk of
damage or injury resulting from speakers
being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 19 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Installing your speaker system
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround
speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).

Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
Center

Subwoofer

Front right

Front left
LINE LEVEL
INPUT

VSX-1019AH
HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
1 3
COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD)
FRONT

OUT

AUDIO
Y

PB R

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

OPTICAL

SIRIUS IN

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN 2 (DVR)
CENTER SURROUND

AM
LOOP

PRE OUT

IN 2

FM
UNBAL
75
ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A

MONITOR
OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

ANTENNA
L

R SURROUND BACK / B L
(Single)

IN
IR

VIDEO

OUT
IN

CONTROL

OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO

The surround back terminals can also be
used for the Speaker B and Zone 2.
7.1 ch surround setting
Surround back right
Surround back left

Surround left

6.1 ch surround setting
Surround back
No connect
Speaker B setting
Speaker B - Left
Speaker B - Right
Zone 2 setting
Zone 2 - Left
Zone 2 - Right

Surround right

19
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 20 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Bi-amping your speakers
Bi-amp compatible
speaker

Bi-amp compatible
speaker

Center
Subwoofer

High

Low

Front right

Front left

HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
1 3
COAXIAL

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

PB R

PR
IN 2
(DVR)
MONITOR
OUT

VIDEO

SIRIUS IN

IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN 2 (DVR)
CENTER SURROUND

AM
LOOP

PRE OUT

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD)
FRONT

OUT

AUDIO

IN 2

FM
UNBAL
75
ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A
R

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

ANTENNA
L

R SURROUND BACK / B L
(Single)

IN
OUT
IN

CONTROL

OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Surround right

Bi-amping is when you connect the high
frequency driver and low frequency driver of
your speakers to different amplifiers for better
crossover performance. Your speakers must be
bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound
improvement will depend on the kind of
speakers you’re using.
CAUTION

Surround left

VSX-1019AH

Bi-wiring your speakers
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they
support bi-amping.
• With these connections, the Surr Back
System setting makes no difference.
• To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker
cables to the speaker terminal on the receiver.
Using a banana plug for the second
connection is recommended.

• Most speakers with both High and Low
terminals have two metal plates that
connect the High to the Low terminals.
These must be removed when you are biamping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker
manual for more information.
• If your speakers have a removable
crossover network, make sure you do not
remove it for bi-amping. Doing so may
damage your speakers.

CAUTION
• Don’t connect different speakers from the
same terminal in this way.
• When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions
for bi-amping shown at the left.

20
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 21 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Selecting the Surr Back system
The surround back terminals can be used for
bi-amping, Speaker B and Zone 2 connections,
in addition to for the surround back speakers.
Make this setting according to the application.

2 Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from
the ‘Surr Back System’ menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 94
to do this.

Zone 2 setup
With these connections you can
simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround
sound in the main zone with stereo playback
on another component in Zone 2.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround
back speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections on page 19.
2 Select ‘ZONE 2’ from the Surr Back
System menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 94
to do this.

Speaker B setup
You can listen to stereo playback in another
room.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround
back speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections on page 19.
2 Select ‘Speaker B’ from the Surr Back
System menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 94
to do this.

Bi-Amping setup
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround
sound.
1 Connect a Bi-amp compatible speakers to
the front and surround back speaker
terminals.
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 20.

21
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 22 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

About the audio connection

About the video converter

There are several types of audio input and
output terminals on this receiver. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following
order:

The video converter ensures that all video
sources are output through all of the
MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only
exception is HDMI: since this resolution
cannot be downsampled, you must connect
your monitor/TV to the receiver’s HDMI video
outputs when connecting this video source.1

HDMI

Digital (Coaxial)

Transferable
audio signals
HD audio

If several video components are assigned to
the same input function (see The Input Setup
menu on page 39), the converter gives priority
to HDMI, component, then composite (in that
order).

Conventional
digital audio

Terminal for
connection with
source device

Terminal for
connection with TV
monitor

Digital (Optical)

RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)

Conventional
analog audio

• With an HDMI cable, video and audio
signals can be transferred in high quality
over a single cable.
CAUTION
• When connecting optical cables, be careful
when inserting the plug not to damage the
shutter protecting the optical socket.
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely.
The cable may be damaged if bent around
sharp corners.

High picture quality

Sound signal priority 

Types of cables and
terminals

HDMI OUT

HDMI IN

COMPONENT
VIDEO IN

COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT

VIDEO IN

VIDEO
MONITOR OUT

Video signals can be output
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Note
1 • If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your
component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be
converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 67) OFF.
• The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/
576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.
• Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the
composite monitor output.

22
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 23 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can
connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO
LINK functions can be used (see KURO LINK on page 60).
VSX-1019AH
HDMI

DIGITAL

ASSIGNABLE AUDIO

OPTICAL

1 3 COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

ASSIGNABLE
IN 2 (DVR)
IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD) IN 1 (TV/SAT)

OUT

IN 3

FRONT

PB R

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

CENTER SURROUND

PRE OUT

IN 2

AUDIO

ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A

MONITOR
OUT

CENTER

SURROUND

IN
IR

OUT

VIDEO

IN
CONTROL

This connection is
required in order to
listen to the sound of
the TV over the receiver.

OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO

R ANALOG L

AUDIO OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT

Select one
HDMI OUT

HDMI/DVI-compatible
Blu-ray disc player

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

Other HDMI/DVIequipped component

• When connecting a Blu-ray disc player,
connect the player to the receiver’s BD IN
terminal.
• The HDMI indicator lights on the front
panel when an HDMI-equipped
component is connected.

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or flat panel TV

• For input components, connections other
than HDMI connections are also possible
(see Connecting your DVD player with no
HDMI output on page 25).
• If your Blu-ray disc player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
on page 28.

23
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 24 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

• The sound of the TV cannot be heard over
the receiver if the TV is connected using an
HDMI cable.
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV
over the receiver, connect the receiver and
TV with audio cables.

About HDMI1
The HDMI connection transfers
uncompressed digital video, as well as almost
every kind of digital audio that the connected
component is compatible with, including DVDVideo, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see
below for limitations), Video CD/Super VCD
and CD. See About the video converter on
page 22 for more on HDMI compatibility.

• Synchronized operation with components
using the KURO LINK function (see KURO
LINK on page 60)
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
“x.v.Color” and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.

This receiver incorporates High-Definition
Multimedia Interface (HDMI™) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described
below through HDMI connections.
• Digital transfer of uncompressed video
(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24,
1080p/60, etc.))
• DeepColor signal transfer2
• x.v.Color signal transfer2
• Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital
audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8
channels
• Input of the following digital audio formats:
– Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS,
High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
Master Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD
(DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD
Note
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High
Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate
adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio
dealer for more information.
• If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front
panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long
as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
• This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these
formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.

24
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 25 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback
component with no HDMI output) to the receiver.
VSX-1019AH
HDMI

DIGITAL

ASSIGNABLE AUDIO

1 3 COAXIAL

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD)

OUT

IN 3

FRONT

AUDIO

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN 2
CENTER SURROUND

(DVR)

PRE OUT

PB R

PB
PR
IN 1
(DVD)

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SPEAKERS
A R

MONITOR
OUT

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

FRONT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

IN
IR

OUT

VIDEO

IN
CONTROL

OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO

HDMI IN
PR

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

R ANALOG L

VIDEO OUT

Select one

AUDIO OUT

COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT

Select one

DVD player etc.

HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or flat panel TV

• If you want to listen to the sound of the TV
over the receiver, connect the receiver and
TV with audio cables.
• Component video should give superior
picture quality when compared to
composite. You can also take advantage of
progressive scan video (if your source and
TV are both compatible), which delivers a
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the
manuals that came with your TV and
source component to check whether they
are compatible with progressive-scan
video.

25
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 26 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback
component) to the receiver.
• With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected
with an HDMI cable. Connect the DVD player’s video signals using a composite or component
cord.

VSX-1019AH
HDMI

DIGITAL

ASSIGNABLE AUDIO

1 3 COAXIAL

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD)

OUT

FRONT

AUDIO

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN
CENTER SURROUND

2 (DVR)
PRE OUT

PB R

PR
IN 1
(DVD)
Y

IN 2

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

DVR
OUT

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A

MONITOR
OUT

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

IN
IR

VIDEO

OUT
IN
CONTROL

OUT

COMPONENT
VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

VIDEO IN

Select one
R ANALOG L

AUDIO OUT

COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT

HDMI OUT

Select one

• Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to
HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an
HDMI cable to input video signals.
Depending on the video component, it may
not be possible to output signals
connected by HDMI and other methods
simultaneously, and it may be necessary to
make output settings. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your
component for more information.

26
En

VIDEO OUT

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Select one

DVD player etc.

• Component video should give superior
picture quality when compared to
composite. You can also take advantage of
progressive scan video (if your source and
TV are both compatible), which delivers a
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the
manuals that came with your TV and source
component to check whether they are
compatible with progressive-scan video.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 27 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

• If your DVD player has multichannel
analog outputs, you can connect these
instead. See also see Connecting the
multichannel analog inputs on page 28.
• The input functions below are assigned by
default to the receiver’s different input
terminals. Refer to The Input Setup menu
on page 39 to change the assignments if
other connections are used.
For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD
input; no other audio signals can be input
to this terminal.
Input
function
DVD

Connecting a satellite/cable
receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial
digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called
‘set-top boxes’.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell
the receiver which input you connected the settop box to (see The Input Setup menu on
page 39).
VSX-1019AH

Input Terminals

HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
1 3
COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

Digital

HDMI

Component
IN 1

COAX-1a

IN 3

IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD) IN 1 (TV/SAT)

OUT

FRONT

CENTER SURROUND

PB R

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

(BD)

IN 2

AUDIO

/COAXb

OPTICAL
ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A

MONITOR
OUT

CENTER

SUR

IN
IR

TV/SAT
DVR

OPT-1
IN 2

CONTROL

OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO

(HDMI-1)

HDMI 2

OUT

VIDEO

OPT-2

HDMI 1

HDMI

(HDMI-2)

(HDMI-3)
COAX-2a

a.VSX-1019AH model only.
b.VSX-919AH model only.

R ANALOG L

AUDIO OUT
VIDEO OUT

COAXIAL
OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT

Select one

STB

27
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 28 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder,
VCR and other video sources

Connecting the multichannel
analog inputs

This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs
and outputs suitable for connecting analog or
digital video devices, including HDD/DVD
recorders and VCRs.

For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD
player may have 5.1 channel analog outputs.
Make sure that the player is set to output
multichannel analog audio.

When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell
the receiver which input you connected the
recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on
page 39).

VSX-1019AH
HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
1 3
COAXIAL

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1

IN 2

IN 3

ASSIGNABLE

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD)
FRONT

OUT

UDIO

IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN 2 (DVR)
CENTER SURROUND

PRE OUT

VSX-1019AH

R
ZONE2
OUT

IN 1

BD IN

IN 2

IN 3

IN 1 (DVD)

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

IN 2 (CD)
FRONT

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN
CENTER SURROUND

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

OPTICAL

AUDIO
Y

TV/SAT
IN

ASSIGNABLE

DVD
IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A

HDMI DIGITAL
ASSIGNABLE AUDIO
1 3
COAXIAL

2 (DVR)
PRE OUT

OUT

IN
CONTROL

OUT

PB R

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

OUT

CD-R

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A
R

MONITOR
OUT

CENTER

SURROUND

IN
IR

OUT

VIDEO

IN
CONTROL

OUT
NENT

R ANALOG L

AUDIO IN

R ANALOG L

VIDEO IN

VIDEO OUT

AUDIO OUT

COAXIAL OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUT

Select one

HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.

• In order to record, you must connect the
analog audio cables (the digital connection
is for playback only).

28
En

FRONT
OUTPUT

CENTER
OUTPUT

SURROUND
OUTPUT

SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT

DVD player, etc.

• If your player has 7.1-channel analog
outputs, the player’s surround back output
terminals are not used. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your
component for more information.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 29 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e.,
it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it
to the CD inputs instead.

Connecting other audio
components
This receiver has both digital and analog
inputs, allowing you to connect audio
components for playback.
This receiver features five stereo audio-only
inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding
outputs for use with audio recorders.
Most digital components also have analog
connections.
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell
the receiver which input you connected the
component to (see also The Input Setup menu
on page 39).

• If you’re connecting a recorder, connect
the analog audio outputs to the analog
audio inputs on the recorder.

About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This unit has an on-board Windows Media™
Audio 9 Professional1 (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so
it is possible to playback WMA9 Pro-encoded
audio using HDMI, coaxial or optical digital
connection when connected to a WMA9 Procompatible player. However, the connected
DVD player, set-top box, etc. must be able to
output WMA9 Pro format audio signals
through a coaxial or optical digital output.

VSX-1019AH
HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
1 3
COAXIAL

ASSIGNABLE

OPTICAL

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

FRONT

SAT

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD-R
OUT
IN

CD
IN

SPEAKERS FRONT
A
R

ASSIGNABLE

IN 1 (DVD) IN 2 (CD) IN 1 (TV/SAT)

OUT

IN 2 (DVR)

CENTER SURROUND

SUBWOOFER

MULTI CH IN
L

CENTER

PRE OUT

SURROUND

IN
IR

OUT
IN
CONTROL

OUT

REC L
AUDIO IN

R ANALOG L

AUDIO OUT

OPTICAL COAXIAL
DIGITAL OUT

Select one

CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.

Note
1 • Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz
sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.

29
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 30 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting AM/FM antennas
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire
antenna as shown below. To improve reception
and sound quality, connect external antennas
(see Connecting external antennas below).
1

Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external
FM antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 Ω.

75 Ω coaxial cable

AM
LOOP

3
5

FM
UNBAL
75

AM
LOOP

ANTENNA

FM
UNBAL
75

ANTENNA

fig. a

fig. b

fig. c

To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m
(16 ft. to 20 ft.) length of vinyl-coated wire to the
AM LOOP terminals without disconnecting
the supplied AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend
horizontally outdoors.
Outdoor
antenna

1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM
antenna wires.
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire
fully into each terminal, then release the tabs
to secure the AM antenna wires.
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached
stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the
direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then
clip the loop onto the stand (fig. b).
• If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a
wall or other surface, secure the stand with
screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to
the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface
and in a direction giving the best reception.
5 Connect the FM wire antenna in the same
way as the AM loop antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully
and fix to a wall or door frame. Don’t drape
loosely or leave coiled up.

30
En

Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
AM
LOOP

FM
UNBAL
75

ANTENNA

5 m to 6 m
(16 ft. to 20 ft.)

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 31 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Sub zone

MULTI-ZONE setup

Main zone
VSX-1019AH

This receiver can power up to two independent
systems in separate rooms after you have
made the proper MULTI-ZONE connections.

VIDEO IN

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

Different sources can be playing in two zones
at the same time or, depending on your needs,
the same source can also be used. The main
and sub zone have independent power (the
main zone power can be off while sub zone is
on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the
remote or front panel controls. However, you
may need to specify the volume settings in
ZONE Audio Setup on page 99.

AUDIO
Y

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

MONITOR
OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO IN
R

COMPONENT
VIDEO

Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you
have a separate TV and speakers for the sub
zone (ZONE2). You will also need a separate
amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE
setup using speaker terminals (Zone 2) below
for the sub zone.

MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows the signals that can
be output to ZONE 2:
Sub Zone Input functions available
ZONE2

Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE2
OUT).a
With video signals,b the composite
video (VIDEO ZONE2 OUT) signals can
be output.

MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker
terminals (Zone 2)
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back
speaker setting on page 94 to use this setup.
Note that the sound in the sub zone will be
temporarily interrupted when controlling the
main zone (for example, changing the input
function or starting playback).
• Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO
ZONE2 OUT jacks on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to
the surround back speaker terminals as shown
below.
Sub zone

Main zone
VSX-1019AH

a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI
CH IN input.)
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the USB input.

SIRIUS IN

VIDEO IN

Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (Zone 2)
• Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO
ZONE2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the
VIDEO ZONE2 OUT jack, both on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to
the sub zone amplifier as shown in the
following illustration.

AUDIO
Y

PB R

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

AM
LOO

OUT

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

IN 1VR)

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

FM
UN
75
ZONE2 OOFER
DVD
IN
OUT

R SURROUND BACK/ B L
(Single)

MONITOR
OUT

VIDEO

PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO

31
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 32 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed
cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the
sub zone remote control in another zone, you
can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles
or Xantech unit) to control your system instead
of the remote sensor on the front panel of this
receiver.1
1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN
jack on the rear of this receiver.
Closet or shelving unit

CONTROL

OUT

HDMI

ASSIGNABLE
1 3

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 3

Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL
jacks which can be used to link components
together so that you can use just the remote
sensor of one component. When you use a
remote control, the control signal is passed
along the chain to the appropriate component.2

OUT

AUDIO
L

PB R

PR
IN 1
(DVD)
Y

IN 2

• If you want to link a Pioneer component to
the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer
components with this unit’s sensor below
to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead
of the IR OUT jack.

Operating other Pioneer
components with this unit’s
sensor

Pioneer
component

Non-Pioneer
component

2 Connect the IR IN jack of another
component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of
this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR
receiver for the type of cable necessary for the
connection.

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

Important
ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

SP
A

MONITOR
OUT

IR
VIDEO

OUT
IN

CD
IN

CONTROL
OUT

COMPONENT
VIDEO

VSX-1019AH

IR receiver

• Note that if you use this feature, make sure
that you also have at least one set of analog
audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to
another component for grounding purposes.
1 Decide which component you want to use
the remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in
the chain, this is the remote sensor at which
you’ll point the corresponding remote control.

Note
1 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver
remote sensor window.
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component
to check for IR compatibility.
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor
on the front panel.
2 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, see Setting the remote to control
other components on page 73.
• If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won’t be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.

32
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 33 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that
component to the CONTROL IN jack of
another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each
end for the connection.
VSX-1019AH

Connecting your
SiriusConnect™ Tuner
To receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio broadcasts, you
will need to activate your SiriusConnect™ tuner.
VSX-1019AH

HDM

ASSIGNABLE
1 3

IN 1

BD IN

ASSIGNABLE

IN 2

IN 3

PB R

PR
IN 1
(DVD)

PR
IN 2
(DVR)

PRE OUT
FM
UNBAL
75

ZONE2
OUT

DVD
IN

TV/SAT
IN

OUT

DVR

AUX
IN

CD
IN

SUBWOOFER

ULTI CH IN

ENTER

MONITOR
OUT

AM
LOOP

ASSIGNABLE
IN 1 (TV/SAT)
IN 2 (DVR)
CENTER SURROUND

SIRIUS IN

OPTICAL

OUT

AUDIO

SUBWOOFER

SURROUND

ANTENNA
L

R SURROUND BACK / B L
(Single)

Antenna

OUT

VIDEO

CONTROL

OUT

SIRIUS

COMPONENT
VIDEO

SIR

IUS

OUT

CONTROL

OUT

CONTROL

RECE
IVER
DVD
TV

SOU

iPod
CD

USB

DVR

TUNE

SEL

A.AT
CH

INFO
DISP

SLEE

T
DIMM

TROL

VIDE
S

MAS
VOLU

3
P

CLAS
ENTE S
R

TER
ME

VOL

LIST
MUT

TUNE

E
TOOL
VIDEO
PARAM
S

ENTE

ETER

T.ED
GUID
E

TUNE

PRES
ET

RETUR
N

STAND
E

LEVE

INPU

CON

ETERO

ORY
HOME
CTRL MENU

STERE
O

DVD
PHAS
MPX

HDM
I

SIRIU

MCA
CC

D.AC
CESS

TV
CH
AUDI
PARAM

TOP
BAND MENU
PRES
ET

CATEG
iPod
AUTO
DIREC/ALC/
HDD T

ANT
AUDI

REMO
SETU
TE
P

RCE

CD-R
R

INPU
SELE
CT T

SIGN

SBch

ARD
CTRL

ADV MENU
SURR

PQLS

STAT
US
MEMO

CTRL

RECEI

VER

MAIN

ZONE

REC
EIV
ER

SiriusConnect™
HOME tuner

AC adapter

• Connect a SiriusConnect™ tuner to the
SIRIUS IN jack on the rear of this receiver.
You will also need to connect the antenna and
AC adapter to the SiriusConnect™ tuner.

Continue the chain in the same way for as
many components as you have.

33
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 34 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a component to the
front panel inputs
The front panel inputs comprise a composite
video jack (VIDEO) and stereo analog audio
inputs (AUDIO L/R). You can use these
connections for any kind of audio/video
component, but they are especially convenient
for portable equipment such as camcorders,
video games and portable audio/video
equipment.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the front panel inputs.
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT
(remote) or the INPUT SELECTOR dial
(front panel) to select VIDEO.
USB

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal
that will allow you to control playback of audio
content from your iPod using the controls of
this receiver.
• Switch the receiver into standby then use
the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod
to the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal on the front
panel of this receiver.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.
• It is also possible to connect using the
cable included with the iPod, but in this
case it is not possible to view pictures via
the receiver.
• For the cable connection, refer to also the
operating instructions for iPod.

MCACC
SETUP MIC

USB

SPEAKERS

USB

MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON / OFF

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MCACC
SETUP MIC

MASTER
VOLUME

MCACC
SETUP MIC

SPEAKERS

USB

MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON / OFF

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MASTER
VOLUME

MCACC
SETUP MIC

This receiver
This receiver
TV game, video camera,
etc.
VIDEO

AUDIO
OUTPUT

iPod cable
(supplied)
MENU







34
En

iPod

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 35 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Connecting your equipment

Connecting a USB device

Plugging in the receiver

It is possible to playback files using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.

Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the
speakers.

• Switch the receiver into standby then
connect your USB device to the iPod/iPhone/
USB terminal on the front panel of this
receiver.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.
iPod
iPhone

USB

SPEAKERS

USB

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MCACC
SETUP MIC

MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON / OFF

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MASTER
VOLUME

MCACC
SETUP MIC

This receiver
USB mass
storage device

• Plug the AC power cord into a convenient
AC power outlet.1
CAUTION
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do
not pull out the plug by tugging the cord,
and never touch the power cord when your
hands are wet, as this could cause a short
circuit or electric shock. Do not place the
unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on
the power cord or pinch the cord in any
other way. Never make a knot in the cord or
tie it with other cables. The power cords
should be routed so that they are not likely
to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electric
shock. Check the power cord once in a
while. If you find it damaged, ask your
nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
• The receiver should be disconnected by
removing the mains plug from the wall
socket when not in regular use, e.g., when
on vacation.
• Make sure the blue  STANDBY/ON light
has gone out before unplugging.
• If you have connected speakers with a 6 Ω
impedance, change the impedance setting
before turning on the power.

Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You
cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this
process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF,
you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature, see KURO LINK on page 60.

35
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 36 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic Setup

Chapter 4:

Basic Setup
Switching the speaker impedance
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this
system, but it is possible to switch the
impedance setting if you plan to use speakers
with a 6 Ω impedance rating.
1

2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME
MENU.
3 Select ‘OSD Language’ from the System
Setup menu.
4.SystemSetup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup

Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press  STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET  NO .

4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
Language :

Exit

Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control)
to select SPEAKER  8Ω , and then use
PRESET +/– (or / on the remote control) to
select SPEAKER 8Ω or SPEAKER 6Ω.
• SPEAKER 8Ω – Use this setting if your
speakers are rated at 8 Ω or more.

English

Return

Exit

• SPEAKER 6Ω – Use this setting if your
speakers are rated at 6 Ω.

Return

Select the desired language.
• English
• French
• German
• Italian

Changing the OSD display
language (OSD Language)

• Spanish
• Dutch

The language used on the on-screen display
can be changed.
• The explanations in these operating
instructions are for when English is
selected for the OSD.

• Russian
5

Select ‘OK’ to change the language.
4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
Language :

1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.

36
En

English

Exit

Return

The setting is completed and the System Setup
menu reappears automatically.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 37 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic Setup

Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the
acoustic characteristics of your listening area,
taking into account ambient noise, speaker
connection and speaker size, and tests for both
channel delay and channel level. After you
have set up the microphone provided with your
system, the receiver uses the information from
a series of test tones to optimize the speaker
settings and equalization for your particular
room.
Make sure you do this before moving on to
Playing a source on page 41.

Switch on the receiver and your TV.

2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level
at your normal listening position (use a tripod if
possible). Make sure there are no obstacles
between the speakers and the microphone.
USB

SPEAKERS

USB

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MCACC
SETUP MIC

MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON / OFF

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

MASTER
VOLUME

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MCACC
SETUP MIC

Important
• Make sure the microphone and speakers
are not moved during the Auto MCACC
Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will
overwrite any existing settings for the
MCACC preset you select.
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and
the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio function
should not be selected as an input
function.

The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
microphone is connected.1
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Surr Back System :
Normal
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1

START

Exit

CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC
Setup are output at high volume.

Return

3 Select Surr Back System setting,2 select
an MCACC preset3, press RECEIVER and then
select START.4

Note
1 • You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected (in either the main
or sub zone). When you set ZONE 2 to ON (page 69), you can’t use the HOME MENU.
• If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read
through Surround back speaker setting on page 94 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before
continuing to step 4.
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 for more on this.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose
an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 91).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save
other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 for
more on this.

37
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 38 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic Setup

Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B,
Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back
System setting according to connections to
the surround back speaker terminals.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if
you’re using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched
on and set to a comfortable volume level.
5 Wait for the test tones to finish, then
confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI
screen.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs test tones to determine the
speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
quiet as possible while it’s doing this.1
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds
while the speaker configuration check screen
is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 6.
• With error messages (such as Too much
ambient noise! or Check microphone.)
select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup below) and verifying the mic
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT
and continue.

The configuration shown on-screen should
reflect the actual speakers you have.
• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there
may be a problem with the speaker
connection.
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off
the power and check the speaker
connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply use / to select
the speaker and / to change the
setting and continue.
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the
speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted.
Check the speaker connections.2
If the connections were wrong, turn off the
power, disconnect the power cable, then
reconnect properly. After this, perform the
Full Auto MCACC procedure again.
6 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs more test tones to
determine the optimum receiver settings for
Channel Level, Speaker Distance, Standing
Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this
is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.

1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...

2/10

Environment Check
Ambient Noise
: OK
Microphone
:
Speaker YES/NO :

1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit

L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
10
OK
Exit

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

Cancel

RETRY
Cancel

Note
1 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly
connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.

38
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 39 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic Setup

7 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is
completed and the Home Menu menu
reappears automatically.1
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from
this receiver upon completion of the Auto
MCACC Setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
should give you excellent surround sound from
your system, but it is also possible to adjust
these settings manually using The Advanced
MCACC menu on page 77 or The system and
the other setup on page 93.2

Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the
Auto MCACC Setup (too much background
noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking
the speakers from the microphone) the final
settings may be incorrect. Check for household
appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.),
that may be affecting the environment and
switch them off if necessary. If there are any
instructions showing in the front panel display,
please follow them.
• Some older TVs may interfere with the
operation of the microphone. If this seems
to be happening, switch off the TV when
doing the Auto MCACC Setup.

The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input
Setup menu if you didn’t hook up your digital
equipment according to the default settings
(see Input function default and possible
settings on page 40). In this case, you need to

tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up
to which terminal so the buttons on the remote
control correspond to the components you’ve
connected.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use  RECEIVER to switch on.
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME
MENU.
4 Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System
Setup menu.
4.SystemSetup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup

4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

INPUT
Input Name
Input Skip

:
:
:

DVD
Rename
OFF

Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In

:
:
:

COAX-1
Return
--Comp-1

Exit

Finish

5 Select the input function that you want to
set up.
The default names correspond with the names
next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as
DVD or VIDEO) which, in turn, correspond
with the names on the remote control.

Note
1 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 89
for more on this.
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5
inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup
on page 94.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.

39
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 40 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic Setup

6 Select the input(s) to which you’ve
connected your component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an
optical output, you will need to change the
DVD input function’s Digital In setting from
COAX-1 (VSX-1019AH model)/COAX (VSX919AH model) (default) to the optical input
you’ve connected it to.The numbering (OPT-1
to 2) corresponds with the numbers beside the
inputs on the back of the receiver.
• If your component is connected via a
component video cable to an input
terminal other than the default, you must
tell the receiver which input terminal your
component is connected to, or else you
may see the composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.1
7 When you’re finished, proceed to the
settings for other inputs.
There are three optional settings in addition to
the assignment of the input jacks:
• Input Name – You can choose to rename
the input function for easier identification.
Select Rename to do so, or Default to
return to the system default.
• Input Skip – When set to ON, that input is
skipped when selecting the input using
INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can
be still be selected directly with the input
function buttons.)

Input function default and possible
settings
The terminals on the receiver generally
correspond to the name of one of the input
functions. If you have connected components
to this receiver differently from (or in addition
to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup
menu on page 39 to tell the receiver how you’ve
connected up. The dots () indicate possible
assignments.
Input
function
DVD

IN 1

(BD)

TV/SAT

OPT-1

c



DVR

OPT-2

c

IN 2

VIDEO
HDMI 1

(HDMI-1)

HDMI 2

(HDMI-2)

HDMI

(HDMI-3)

iPod/USB
CD
CD-R/TAPE

COAX-2a


TUNER

MULTI CH IN

INPUT
Input Name
Input Skip

:
:
:

DVD
Rename
OFF

SIRIUS

Digital In
HDMI Input
Component In

:
:
:

COAX-1
--Comp-1

Finish

Component

c

A/V RECEIVER

Exit

HDMI

COAX-1a
/COAXb

AUX
4b.Input Setup

Input Terminals
Digital


c


a.VSX-1019AH model only.
b.VSX-919AH model only.
c.With KURO LINK set to ON, assignments cannot be
made (see KURO LINK on page 60).

8 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in
Setting the Video options on page 67), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as
you used to connect your video component.

40
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 41 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Chapter 5:

Basic playback
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a
source (such as a DVD disc) with your home
theater system.
1 Switch on your system components and
receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component
(for example a DVD player), your TV1 and
subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver
(press  RECEIVER).
• Make sure the setup microphone is
disconnected.
2 Select the input function you want to
play.
You can use the input function buttons on the
remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front
panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.2

It is possible to check on the front panel display
whether or not multi-channel playback is being
performed properly.
When using a surround back speaker,
2D+PLIIx MOVIE is displayed when playing
Dolby Digital signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is
displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.
When not using a surround back speaker,
DOLBY DIGITAL is displayed when playing
Dolby Digital signals.
If the display does not correspond to the input
signal and listening mode, check the
connections and settings.
4 Use the volume control to adjust the
volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all
sound is coming from the speakers connected
to this receiver.

3 Press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT (AUTO SURR/
ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO
SURROUND’ and start playback of the
source.3
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround
sound DVD disc, you should hear surround
sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you
will only hear sound from the front left/right
speakers in the default listening mode.
• See also Listening to your system on
page 53 for information on different ways
of listening to sources.
Note
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO
jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 58).
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be
set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option,
set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this
case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 53 if you
need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.

41
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 42 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Playing a source with HDMI
connection
• Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI
input you’ve connected to (for example,
HDMI 1).
You can also perform the same operation by
using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote
control repeatedly.
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the
Audio options on page 64 to THROUGH if
you want to hear HDMI audio output from
your TV or flat panel TV (no sound will be
heard from this receiver).
• If the video signal does not appear on your
TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the
resolution settings on your component or
display. Note that some components (such
as video game units) have resolutions that
may not be converted. In this case, use an
analog video connection.

Selecting the multichannel analog
inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD
player as above, you must select the analog
multichannel inputs for surround sound
playback.1
1 Make sure you have set the playback
source to the proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD
player to output multichannel analog audio.
2 Use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on
the front panel.
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using,
the analog output level of the subwoofer
channel may be too low. In this case, the
output level of the subwoofer can be
increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In
Setup in Other Setup. For details, see
Multi Channel Input Setup on page 99.

Note
1 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
• You can’t listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
• With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup
on page 99.

42
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 43 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Playing back audio files stored on an iPod

Playing an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that
will allow you to control playback of audio content
from your iPod using the controls of this receiver.1
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting an iPod on page 34.
2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to
switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the
receiver verifies the connection and retrieves
data from the iPod.
When the display shows iPod top menu you’re
ready to play music from the iPod.2
• Main Zone:

To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take
advantage of the GUI screen of your TV connected
to this receiver.3 You can also control all operations
for music in the front panel display of this receiver.

Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver,
you can browse songs stored on your iPod by
playlist, artist name, album name, song name,
genre or composer, similar to using your iPod
directly.
1 Use / to select a category, then press
ENTER to browse that category.
• To return to the previous level any time,
press RETURN.
2 Use / to browse the selected category
(e.g., albums).
• Use / to move to previous/next levels.

iPod
A/V RECEIVER
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
1/ 9

3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press  to start
playback.4
• Main Zone:

iPod CTRL

• Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Track Title

Top Menu
PLAY

iPod

xxxx/xxxx

3:02

-2:02

Artist Name

Shuffle On

Album Title

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Podcasts
Genres
Composers
Audiobooks
1/9

]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]

Track number
Track title
Play mode
Artist name
Album title

iPod

Now Playing

Playing time
File information

Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Chapter Number : xxx/xxx
iPod CTRL

List

Note
1 • This system is compatible with the audio and the video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation, iPod classic, iPod
touch and iPhone (iPod shuffle is not supported). However, that some of the functions may be restricted for some
models. Note, however, compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be
sure to use the latest available software version.
• iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted
to reproduce.
• Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer
off before connecting.
• Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure
2 • The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
• VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB function cannot be selected for the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 69).
3 • Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
• This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to
the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 44).
4 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.

43
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 44 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

• Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Play

xxxx/xxxx
Chap xxx/xxx
Track Title
Shuffle On

3:02

-2:02
Artist Name
Album Title

Track number
File information
Track title
Play mode
Playing time
Artist name
Album title

Button

Press repeatedly to switch between
Repeat One, Repeat All and Repeat Off.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Albums and
Shuffle Off.
DISP

Press repeatedly to change the song
playback information displayed in the
front panel display.

ENTER

When browsing, press to move to next
levels. During playback, press to set the
play and pause modes.

Navigation through categories on your iPod
looks like this:
Playlists  Songs
Artists  Albums  Songs
Albums  Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres  Artists  Albums  Songs
Composers  Albums  Songs
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs

RETURN When browsing, press to move to
previous levels.
/

When browsing, press to move to
previous/next levels.

/

During Audiobook playback, press to
switch the playback speed: Faster 
Normal  Slower

TOP
MENU

Press to return to the iPod top menu
screen.

Tip
• You can play all of the songs in a particular
category by selecting the All item at the top
of each category list. For example, you can
play all the songs by a particular artist.

Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback
controls for your iPod. Press iPod USB to
switch the remote control to the iPod/USB
operation mode.
Button

What it does



Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something
other than a song is selected, all the
songs that fall into that category will play.



Pauses/unpauses playback.

What it does

Switching the iPod controls1
You can switch over the iPod controls between
the iPod and the receiver.
1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod
controls.2
This enables operation and display on your
iPod, and this receiver’s remote control and
GUI screen become inactive.
2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to
the receiver controls.

/ Press and hold during playback to start
scanning.
/ Press to skip to previous/next track.

Note
1 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.
2 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the
iPod are played, the playback picture is displayed.

44
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 45 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Important

Playing a USB device
1

It is possible to playback files using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting a USB device on page 35.2
2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to
switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this
receiver starts recognizing the USB device
connected.3 When the display shows USB Top
menu you’re ready to playback from the USB
device.
• Main Zone:
USB Top
A/V RECEIVER
Music
Photos
Slideshow Setup

If an Over Current message lights in the
display, the power requirements of the USB
device are too high for this receiver. Try
following the points below:
• Switch the receiver off, then on again.
• Reconnect the USB device with the
receiver switched off.
• Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with
the device) for USB power.
If this doesn’t remedy the problem, it is likely
your USB device is incompatible.

Playing back audio files stored on a
USB memory device
The maximum number of levels that you can
select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can
display and play back up to 30 000 folders and
files within a USB memory device.4

1/3

• Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
USB Top
[ Music
[ Photos
[ Slideshow Setup

]
]
]

1/3

Note
1 • Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and
digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer
for USB playback.
• Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and
assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
3 • If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
• When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen
instead; when neither the album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
• Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
• VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB function cannot be selected for the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 69).
• If this error occurs, playback is interrupted and the next playable file is played automatically.
• This error may occur if the title information is changed on a computer, etc.
4 • Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.
• When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.
• This receiver does not support a USB hub.
• Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
• DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.

45
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 46 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

1 Use / to select ‘Music’ from the USB
Top menu.
USB Top
A/V RECEIVER
Music
Photos
Slideshow Setup

Music

Top Menu

Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback
controls for your USB memory device. Press
iPod USB to switch the remote control to the
iPod/USB operation mode.
Button

What it does



Press to start playback.



Pauses/unpauses playback.

A/V RECEIVER
Folder1
Folder2
Folder3
Music1
Music2
Music3
Music4
Music5
1/ 9

1/3

/ Press and hold during playback to start
scanning.
Return

/ Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Repeat One, Repeat Folder, Repeat All
and Repeat Off.

2 Use / to select a folder, then press
ENTER to browse that folder.
• To return to the previous level any time,
press RETURN.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press  to start
playback.
• Main Zone:

Press repeatedly to switch between
Random On and Random Off.
DISP

Press repeatedly to change the song
playback information displayed in the
front panel display.

ENTER

When browsing, press to move to next
levels. During playback, press to set the
play and pause modes.

Track number
Track title or File name
Track Title

Top Menu
PLAY

xxxx/xxxx

3:02

-2:02

Artist Name

Random On

Album Title

Playing time
Play mode
Artist name
Album title or Folder
name

USB

Now Playing
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx

File information
Return

• Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Track title or File name
Play

xxxx/xxxx
Track Title

Track number
Play mode

Random On
3:02

-2:02
Artist Name
Album Title

46
En

Playing time
Album title or Folder
name
Artist name

RETURN When browsing, press to move to
previous levels.
/

When browsing, press to move to
previous/next levels.

TOP
MENU

Press to return to the USB Top menu.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 47 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Playing back photo files stored on a
USB memory device1
1 Use / to select ‘Photos’ from the USB
Top menu.

Slideshow Setup
Make the various settings for playing
slideshows of photo files here.
1 Use / to select ‘Slideshow Setup’
from the USB Top menu.

USB Top
A/V RECEIVER

USB Top

Music
Photos
Slideshow Setup

A/V RECEIVER
Music
Photos
Slideshow Setup
Top Menu

Slideshow Setup
A/V RECEIVER

1/3
1/3

2 Use / to select a folder, then press
ENTER to browse that folder.
• To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press  to start
playback.2
The selected content is displayed in full screen
and starts a slideshow.

Theme
Interval
BGM
Music Select
Folder1

:
:
:
:

Normal(OFF)
5 sec
ON
Select
Return

Return

Select the setting you want.
• Theme – Add various effects to the
slideshow.
• Interval – Set the interval for switching the
photos. This may not be available
depending on the Theme setting.

After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER
toggles between play and pause.

• BGM – Play music files stored on the USB
device while displaying photos.

Basic playback controls

• Music Select – Select the folder containing
the music files to be played when BGM is
set to ON.

Button(s) Function
ENTER,  Starts displaying a photo and playing a
slideshow.
RETURN,


Stops the Player and returns to the
previous menu.



Displays the previous photo content



Display the next photo content



Pauses/unpauses the slideshow

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the USB Top menu.

Note
1 VSX-1019AH model only: Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.

47
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 48 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

About playable file formats
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.

Music files
Category

Extension

Stream

MP3a

.mp3

MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio
Layer-3

WAV

WMA

.wav

.wma

LPCM

WMA8/9b

Sampling frequency

8 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate

16 bit

Channel

2 ch

Bitrate

8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR

Supported/Supported

Sampling frequency

32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate

8 bit, 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit

Channel

2 ch, Monaural

Sampling frequency

8 kHz to 48 kHz

Quantization bitrate

16 bit

Channel

2 ch

Bitrate

8 kbps to 320 kbps

VBR/CBR

Supported/Supported

a.“MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.”
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported;
specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.

Photo files

48
En

Category

Preset number

• Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Channel name
Song name
Preset class
Signal strength

Johnny B. Goode
A
Chuck Berry
Fifties (50’s)
Decades

A1
123

Artist name
Preset number
Channel number

Chuck Berry

Composer name
Category

Note
1 • In order to activate your radio subscription, you will need the SIRIUS ID (SID) which uniquely identifies your tuner.
The SID may be found on a sticker located on the packaging, or on the bottom of the tuner itself. The label will have
a printed 12-digit SID number. When you have located the SID, write it down in the space provided near the end of
this manual. Contact SIRIUS on the internet at: https://activate.siriusradio.com
• Follow the prompts to activate your subscription, or you can also call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888539-7474).
• Select 0 (SIRIUS ID) from the GUI screen to check the Radio ID of the SIRIUS Connect tuner (see Selecting channels
and browsing by genre below).
2 You can check the strength of reception in Using the SIRIUS Menu on page 51.
3 It’s easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage of the GUI screens. You can, however, use just the front
panel display to do everything if you prefer.

49
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 50 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Selecting channels and browsing by genre

Saving channel presets

From the SIRIUS Channel Guide, you can
browse SIRIUS Radio channels in the order
that they appear, or you can narrow your
channel search by genre.

This receiver can memorize up to 63 channels,
stored in seven banks, or classes (A to G) of 9
channels each.

• Main Zone:
Channel Guide

1 Select the channel you want to memorize.
See Selecting channels and browsing by genre
above.

A/V RECEIVER
184
185
186
187
188
192
193
198

Weather
TWN
Hardcore Sports
InfoPlus
RCI Plus
Rock Velours
energie2
Playboy

2 Press T.EDIT.
The display shows a blinking memory class.

Exit

• Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven
classes, then press / to select the channel
preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select
a preset.

Channel Guide
[ 184
[ 185
[ 186
[ 187
[ 188
[ 192
[ 193
[ 198
1/xxx

Weather
TWN
Hardcore Sports
InfoPlus
RCI Plus
Rock Velours
energie2
Playboy

]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]

1 Press / to enter the SIRIUS Channel
Guide, then navigate through the channels
one at time with /, then press ENTER to
listen to the SIRIUS radio broadcast.
• To browse by genre, first press
CATEGORY, use / to select a genre,
then press ENTER.
• To cancel and exit any time, press RETURN.
Tip
• You can select channels directly by
pressing D.ACCESS, then the three-digit
channel number.
• You can press DISP to change SIRIUS Radio
information in the front panel display.

4 Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and
number stop blinking and the receiver stores
the SIRIUS channel.
Tip
• You can also press MEMORY during
reception display to save the information of
up to five songs. See Using the SIRIUS
Menu below to recall this information.1

Listening to channel presets
1 Press CLASS to select the class in which
the channel is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
2 Press / to select the channel preset
you want.
• You can also use the number buttons on
the remote control to recall the channel
preset.

• The currently selected channel is
automatically chosen (without pressing
ENTER) after 10 seconds.

Note
1 You can reset the Channel presets, Memory, Channel Skip/Add, Parental Lock and Password settings in Resetting the
system on page 72.

50
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 51 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Using the SIRIUS Menu
The SIRIUS Menu provides additional SIRIUS
Radio features.
1

3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning – To search for stations
in the currently selected band, press and
hold TUNE / for about a second. The
receiver will start searching for the next
station, stopping when it has found one.
Repeat to search for other stations.
Manual tuning – To change the frequency
one step at a time, press TUNE /.

Press TOP MENU.

2 Use / to select a menu item, then
press ENTER.
Choose from the following menu items:
• Channel Skip/Add – Use / and ENTER
to select channels you would like to
remove/restore from/to the channel guide.
• Parental Lock – Use / and ENTER to
select channels you would like to place
under parental lock. Channels put under
parental lock are not displayed in the
Channel Guide, but may be accessed by
directly inputting their channel number
and providing the parental lock password.
• Antenna Aiming – Check the strength of
satellite and terrestrial reception.
• Memory Recall – Use / to browse your
saved song information (see Tip above).
• Password Set – Set the parental lock
password.
3 When you’re finished press TOP MENU to
return to the reception display.

Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to
FM and AM radio broadcasts using the
automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning
functions. If you already know the frequency of
the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station
you can memorize the frequency for recall
later—see Saving station presets on page 52
for more on how to do this.
1

Press TUNER to select the tuner.

2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM),
if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and
AM.

High speed tuning – Press and hold
TUNE / for high speed tuning. Release
the button at the frequency you want.

Improving FM sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesn’t light
when tuning to an FM station because the
signal is weak, press MPX to switch the
receiver into mono reception mode. This
should improve the sound quality and allow
you to enjoy the broadcast.

Using Neural THX
This feature uses Neural Surround™, THX®
technologies to achieve optimal surround
sound from FM radio.
• While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/
ALC/DIRECT for Neural THX listening.
See About Neural – THX Surround on page 114
for more on this.
The Neural THX mode can be selected also
with STANDARD.

Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, you’ll already know the frequency of
the station you want to listen to. In this case, you
can simply enter the frequency directly using
the number buttons on the remote control.
1

Press TUNER to select the tuner.

2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM),
if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and
AM.

51
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 52 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Basic playback

Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).

4 Use the number buttons to enter the
frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0,
6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press
D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and
start over.

2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a
blinking cursor at the first character position.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a
name up to eight characters long.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789

Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station,
it’s convenient to have the receiver store the
frequency for easy recall whenever you want to
listen to that station. This saves the effort of
manually tuning in each time. This receiver can
memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.
When saving an FM frequency, the MPX
setting (see page 51) is also stored.

!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Tip
• To erase a station name, simply repeat
steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead
of a name.
• Once you have named a station preset, you
can press DISP when listening to a station
to switch the display between name and
frequency.

1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 51 for more
on this.
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a
blinking memory class.

Listening to station presets

3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven
classes, then press PRESET / to select the
station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select
a station preset.

4 Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and
number stop blinking and the receiver stores
the station.

Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your
station presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to
name.
See Listening to station presets below for how
to do this.

52
En

You will need to have some presets stored to do
this. See Saving station presets above if you
haven’t done this already.
Press TUNER to select the tuner.

2 Press CLASS to select the class in which
the station is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
3 Press PRESET / to select the station
preset you want.
• You can also use the number buttons on the
remote control to recall the station preset.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 53 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Listening to your system

Chapter 6:

Listening to your system
Important
• The listening modes and many features
described in this section may not be
available depending on the current source,
settings and status of the receiver.

Tip
• When an ALC is selected, the effect level
can be adjusted using the EFFECT
parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 64.

Auto playback

Listening in surround sound

There are many ways to listen back to sources
using this receiver, but for the simplest, most
direct listening option is the Auto Surround
feature. The receiver automatically detects what
kind of source you’re playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.1

Using this receiver, you can listen to any
source in surround sound. However, the
options available will depend on your speaker
setup and the type of source you’re listening to.

• While listening to a source, press
RECEIVER , then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT)2 for
auto playback of a source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display
before showing the decoding or playback
format. Check the digital format indicators in
the front panel display to see how the source is
being processed.
• When listening to the FM radio, the Neural
THX feature is selected automatically (see
Using Neural THX on page 51 for more on
this).
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this
receiver equalizes playback sound levels.

If you connected surround back speakers, see
also Using surround back channel processing
on page 56.

Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround
sound for stereo and multichannel sources.3
• While listening to a source, press
RECEIVER , then press STANDARD
(STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a
listening mode.
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby
Surround encoded, the proper decoding
format will automatically be selected and
shows in the display.4

Note
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see
Listening in surround sound above for more on these decoding formats).
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 56.
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
4 If surround back channel processing (page 56) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this
happens automatically if the Surround back speaker setting on page 94 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic
IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).

53
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 54 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Listening to your system

With two channel sources, you can select from:

Using the Advanced surround effects

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel
sound, especially suited to movie sources

The Advanced surround effects can be used for
a variety of additional surround sound effects.
Most Advanced Surround modes are designed
to be used with film soundtracks, but some
modes are also suited for music sources. Try
different settings with various soundtracks to
see which you like.

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel
sound, especially suited to music sources1
• 2 Pro Logic IIx GAME – Up to 7.1 channel
sound, especially suited to video games
• 2 PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround
sound (sound from the surround speakers
is mono)
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources

• Press RECEIVER , then press ADV SURR
(ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to
select a listening mode.4
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with
dynamic soundtracks

• Neo:6 MUSIC – 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources2

• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of
dialog

• Neural THX – Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources3

• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with
lots of special effects

With multichannel sources, if you have
connected surround back speaker(s) and have
selected SBch ON, you can select (according to
format):

• MONO FILM – Creates surround sound
from mono soundtracks

• 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only
available when you’re using two surround
back speakers)
• 2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back
channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and
provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel
sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)

• ENT.SHOW – Suitable for musical sources
• EXPANDED – Creates an extra wide stereo
field5
• TV SURROUND – Provides surround
sound for both mono and stereo TV
sources
• ADVANCED GAME – Suitable for video
games
• SPORTS – Suitable for sports programs

• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
playback with DTS-ES encoded sources

• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert halltype sound

• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
playback with DTS encoded sources

• ROCK/POP – Creates a live concert sound
for rock and/or pop music

Note
1 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can
adjust: C.WIDTH, DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 64 to adjust them.
2 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image
effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 64).
3 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital,
DTS or analog 2-channel sources.
4 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back
speakers in your setup. For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 56.
• If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically
be selected.
5 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital
sources).

54
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 55 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Listening to your system

• UNPLUGGED – Suitable for acoustic
music sources
• EXT.STEREO – Gives multichannel sound to
a stereo source, using all of your speakers
• PHONES SURR. – When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of
overall surround.
Tip
• When an Advanced Surround listening
mode is selected, the effect level can be
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in
Setting the Audio options on page 64.

Listening in stereo
When you select STEREO, you will hear the
source through just the front left and right
speakers (and possibly your subwoofer
depending on your speaker settings). Dolby
Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro multichannel
sources are downmixed to stereo.
• While listening to a source, press
RECEIVER , then press STEREO for stereo
playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:

Using Front Stage Surround
Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function
allows you to create natural surround sound
effects using just the front speakers and the
subwoofer.
• While listening to a source, press
RECEIVER , then press STEREO to select Front
Stage Surround Advance modes.
• STEREO – See Listening in stereo above for
more on this.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – Use to provide a rich
surround sound effect directed to the
center of where the front left and right
speakers sound projection area converges.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – Use to provide a
surround sound effect to a wider area than
FOCUS mode.1
FOCUS position
(Recommended)
Front left
speaker

Front right
speaker

WIDE position
Front left
speaker

Front right
speaker

• STEREO – The audio is heard with your
surround settings and you can still use the
Midnight, Loudness, and Tone functions.
• F.S.SURR FOCUS – See Using Front Stage
Surround Advance below for more on this.
• F.S.SURR WIDE – See Using Front Stage
Surround Advance below for more on this.

Note
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced
MCACC is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37.

55
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 56 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Listening to your system

Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want
to hear the truest possible reproduction of a
source. All unnecessary signal processing is
bypassed, and you’re left with the pure analog
or digital sound source.
• While listening to a source, press
RECEIVER , then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select
the mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front
panel display to see how the source is being
processed.
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on
page 53.
• ALC – Listening in Auto level control mode
(page 53).
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to
the settings made in the Surround Setup
(speaker setting, channel level, speaker
distance, acoustic calibration EQ, and Xcurve), as well as with dual mono, the input
attenuator, and any sound delay settings.
You will hear sources according to the
number of channels in the signal.
• PURE DIRECT – Analog sources are heard
without any digital processing. No sound is
output from the Speaker B in this mode.

Using surround back channel
processing
• Default setting: SBch ON
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1
or 7.1 decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you
can choose to always use 6.1 or 7.1 decoding
(for example, with 5.1 encoded material). With
5.1 encoded sources, a surround back channel
will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was
originally encoded (in which case, you can
simply switch surround back channel
processing off).
• With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio
signals that have undergone matrix
decoding processing through surround
back channel processing to which the Up
Mix function is added are output from the
surround back speakers.
• Press RECEIVER , then press SBch
repeatedly to cycle the surround back
channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as
follows:
• SBch ON – Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component
from the surround component is turned on.
• SBch AUTO – Matrix decoding processing
for generating the surround back
component from the surround component
is switched automatically. Matrix decoding
processing is only performed when
surround back channel signals are
detected in the input signals.
• SBch OFF – Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component
from the surround component is turned off.

56
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 57 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Listening to your system

Using the Virtual Surround Back
mode

• Using the Up Mix function is effective when
the speakers in the 7.1-channel surround
system are set up as recommended in the
example on page 17.

• Default setting: ON
When you’re not using surround back
speakers, selecting this mode allows you to
hear a virtual surround back channel through
your surround speakers. You can choose to
listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds
better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which
it was originally encoded, you can have the
receiver only apply this effect to 6.1 encoded
sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.1

• Depending on the positions of the speakers
and the sound source, in some cases it
may not be possible to achieve good
results. In this case, set the setting to OFF.
Up Mix OFF

• Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual
surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as
follows:
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is
always used (for example, on 5.1 encoded
material)
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back
is automatically applied to 6.1 encoded
sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES)
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back
mode is switched off

Setting the Up Mix function

Up Mix ON

FL SW C

?
SBL

SBR

SBL

SBR

Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press  STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET  NO .
Use TUNE +/– (or / on the remote control)
to select UP MIX ON , and then use
PRESET +/– (or / on the remote control) to
select ON or OFF.
3

Press ENTER to confirm.
• When set to ON, the UP MIX indicator on
the front panel lights.

In a 7.1-channel surround system with
surround speakers placed directly at the sides
of the listening position, the surround sound of
5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. The
Up Mix function mixes the sound of the
surround speakers with the surround back
speakers so that the surround sound is heard
from diagonally to the rear as it should be.2
Note
1 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of
the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO
or if Front Bi-Amp, Speaker B or Zone 2 is selected at Surr Back System.
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
2 • Set to ON regardless of this setting when playing DTS-HD signals.
• May automatically be set to OFF even when set to ON, depending on the input signal and listening mode.

57
En

06_playing_sources.fm 58 ページ

２００９年１月８日 木曜日 午後７時５分

Listening to your system

Selecting MCACC presets
• Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different
listening positions1, you can switch between
settings to suit the kind of source you’re
listening to and where you’re sitting (for
example, watching movies from a sofa, or
playing a video game close to the TV).
• While listening to a source, press
RECEIVER , then press MCACC.
Press repeatedly to select one of the six
MCACC presets2.
See Data Management on page 91 to check
and manage your current settings.

Each press cycles through the options as
follows:
• AUTO – The receiver selects the first
available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial
digital signal.
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.4
• PCM – For PCM input signals.5 The
receiver selects the first available signal in
the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL.
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, the indicators
light according to the signal being decoded, as
follows:

Choosing the input signal

– 2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital
decoding.

On this receiver, it is possible to switch the
input signals for the different inputs as
described below.3

– 2 DIGITAL PLUS lights with Dolby Digital
Plus decoding.

• Press RECEIVER , then press SIGNAL SEL
to select the input signal corresponding to
the source component.

– 2 TrueHD lights with Dolby TrueHD
decoding.
– DTS lights with DTS decoding.
– DTS HD lights with DTS-HD decoding.
– MSTR lights with DTS-HD Master Audio
decoding.
– 96/24 lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.

Note
1 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how
you’re using your system. These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78, either of which you should have already completed.
2 • These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
• You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
3 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro
digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32
kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio
(including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN and TUNER).
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise,
make the proper digital connections (page 29) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your
DVD player.
4 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 64 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through
your TV, not from this receiver.
5 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input
signal if this is a problem.

58
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 59 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Listening to your system

– WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9
Pro signal is being decoded.
• HDMI is not assigned by default. To select
an HDMI signal, conduct the input setup
procedure (see The Input Setup menu on
page 39).

Better sound using Phase
Control
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses
phase correction measures to make sure your
sound source arrives at the listening position
in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/
or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent
sound reproduction through the use of phase
matching1 for an optimal sound image. The
default setting is on and we recommend
leaving Phase Control switched on for all
sound sources.
• Press RECEIVER , then press PHASE CTRL
(PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase
correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front
panel lights.

Note
1 • Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are ‘in phase’,
they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest
of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be ‘out of phase’ and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
• The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
• If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0°). However, the effect you can actually
feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer
to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
• Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff
frequency to a higher value.
• If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
• The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
– When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
– When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.
– When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 64.

59
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 60 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

KURO LINK

Chapter 7

KURO LINK
Synchronized operation with a KURO LINKcompatible Pioneer flat panel TV or Blu-ray disc
player or with a component of another make
that supports the KURO LINK function is
possible when the component is connected to
the receiver using an HDMI cable.
For details about concrete operations, settings,
etc., refer to also the operating instructions for
each component.
• You cannot use this function with
components that do not support KURO
LINK.
• We do not guarantee this receiver will work
with Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible
components or components of other makes
that support the KURO LINK function. We
do not guarantee that all synchronized
operations will work with components of
other makes that support the KURO LINK
function.
• Use a High Speed HDMI™ cable when you
want to use the KURO LINK function. The
KURO LINK function may not work
properly if a different type of HDMI cable is
used.

Making the KURO LINK
connections
You can use synchronized operation for a
connected flat panel TV and up to four (VSX1019AH model)/three (VSX-919AH model) other
components.
Be sure to connect the flat panel TV’s audio
cable to the audio input of this unit.
For details, see Connecting your TV and
playback components on page 23.
Important
• When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power
off and disconnect the power cord from the
wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect
the power cords to the wall socket.
• After this receiver is connected to an AC
outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI
initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the
display unit blinks during initialization, and
you can turn this receiver on once it has
stopped blinking.
• To get the most out of this function, we
recommend that you connect your HDMI
component not to a flat panel TV but rather
directly to the HDMI terminal on this
receiver.
• While the receiver is equipped with four
(VSX-1019AH model)/three (VSX-919AH
model) HDMI inputs, the KURO LINK
function can only be used with up to three
DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three
DVD or Blu-ray disc recorders.

60
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 61 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

KURO LINK

Cautions on the KURO LINK function
• Connect the TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
• Only connect components (Blu-ray disc
player, etc.) you intend to use as a source
to the HDMI input of this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
• When KURO LINK is set to ON, HDMI
Input is automatically set to OFF.
• If a listening mode other than AUTO
SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT
or STEREO is selected while the PQLS
effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is
disabled.
• When this receiver is connected by HDMI
cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible
with the PQLS function via HDMI
connection and a CD is played or HDMI
reauthentication is performed (the HDMI
indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is
enabled and the listening mode is set to
AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode
other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC,
DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is
selected.
• When the receiver’s KURO LINK is turned
ON, even if the receiver’s power is in the
standby mode, it is possible to output the
audio and video signals from a player via
HDMI to the TV without producing sound
from the receiver, but only when a KURO
LINK-compatible component (Blu-ray disc
player, etc.) and compatible TV are
connected. In this case, the receiver’s
power turns on and the power and HDMI
indicators light.

About connections with a product of
a different brand that supports the
KURO LINK function
The synchronized operations below can be
used when the receiver’s KURO LINK function
is connected to a TV of a brand other than
Pioneer that supports the KURO LINK
function. (Depending on the TV, however,
some of the KURO LINK functions may not
work.)
• You can set whether to output the sound
over the speakers connected to the
receiver or over the TV’s speakers using the
TV’s menu screen.
• You can adjust the receiver’s volume or
mute the sound using the TV’s remote
control.
• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the
receiver’s power is also set to standby.
(Only when the input for a component
connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching
the TV)
• The sound of TV programs or an external
input connected to the TV can also be
output from the speakers connected to the
receiver. (This requires connection of an
optical digital cable, etc., in addition to the
HDMI cable.)
The synchronized operations below can be
used when the receiver’s KURO LINK function
is connected to a player or recorder of a brand
other than Pioneer that supports the KURO
LINK function.
• When playback starts on the player or
recorder, the receiver’s input switches to
the HDMI input to which that component is
connected.
See the Pioneer website for the latest
information on the models of non-Pioneer
brands and products that support the KURO
LINK function.

61
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 62 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

KURO LINK

KURO LINK Setup
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as
well as KURO LINK-compatible connected
components in order to make use of the KURO
LINK function. For more information see the
operating instructions for each component.
1

Press RECEIVER , then press Home Menu.

Select ‘System Setup’, then press ENTER.

Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
4d1.KURO LINK Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
A/V RECEIVER
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction
Setup
KURO
LINK
:
ON
Display Power Off :
YES

Exit

• YES – The all power off function is enabled.
The receiver’s power turns off together with
the TV’s power.
This function only works when the input for
a component connected to the receiver by
HDMI connection is selected or when
watching the TV.
• NO – The all power off function is disabled.
The receiver’s power is not affected when
the TV’s power is turned off.
6 When you’re finished, press HOME MENU.
You will finish to HOME MENU.

Return

Exit

5 Select the ‘Display Power Off’ setting
you want.
If the TV’s power is turned off while using the
KURO LINK function, the receiver’s power is
also turned off (all power off function). This
function can be disabled.

Finish

4 Select the ‘KURO LINK’ setting you want.
Choose whether to set this unit’s KURO LINK
function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to
ON to use the KURO LINK function.
When using a component that does not
support the KURO LINK function, set this to
OFF.
• ON – Enables the KURO LINK function.
When this unit’s power is turned off and
you have a supported source begin
playback while using the KURO LINK
function, the audio and video output from
the HDMI connection are output from the
flat panel TV.
• OFF – The KURO LINK is disabled.
Synchronized operations cannot be used.
When this unit’s power is turned off, audio
and video of sources connected via HDMI
are not output.

Setting the PQLS function
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a
digital audio signal transfer control technology
using the KURO LINK function. It offers higherquality audio playback by controlling audio
signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible
player, etc. This enables removing jitter that
has a negative effect on the quality of the
sound and is generated upon transmission.
This function is activated when KURO LINK is
set to ON.
1 Press RECEIVER , then press PQLS to
select PQLS setting.
The setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
• PQLS AUTO – PQLS is enabled. A
precision quartz controller in this receiver
eliminates distortion caused by timing
errors (jitter), giving you the best possible
digital-to-analog conversion from audio CD
sources when you use the HDMI interface.
This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLScompatible players.
• PQLS OFF – PQLS is disabled.

62
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 63 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

KURO LINK

Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and
settings, you must:
1

Put all components into standby mode.

2 Turn the power on for all components,
with the power for the flat panel TV being
turned on last.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video
output from connected components displays
properly on the screen or not.
4 Check whether the components
connected to all HDMI inputs are properly
displayed.

Synchronized amp mode

• The receiver’s input switches automatically
when the KURO LINK-compatible
component is played.
• The receiver’s input switches automatically
when the TV’s channel is switched.
• The synchronized amp mode remains in
effect even if the receiver’s input is
switched to a component other than one
connected by HDMI.
The operations below can also be used on
Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible flat panel TVs.
• When the receiver’s volume is adjusted or
the sound is muted, the volume status is
displayed on the flat panel TV’s screen.
• When the OSD language is switched on
the flat panel TV, the receiver’s language
setting also switches accordingly.

Canceling synchronized amp mode

The synchronized amp mode can be set from
the KURO LINK-compatible TV’s remote
control. See the explanation below for
operations in the synchronized amp mode.

• When the synchronized amp mode is
canceled, the receiver’s power turns off if
you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV
program on the TV.

These functions are set from the TV’s menu
screen. For more information, refer to the
operating instructions of the KURO LINKcompatible TV.

• When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled when
the receiver’s power is turned off. To turn
the synchronized amp mode back on,
select the synchronized amp mode using
the TV’s remote control.

Synchronized amp mode operations
When using the synchronized amp mode, the
KURO LINK-compatible component
connected to the receiver operates in sync as
described below.
• The receiver’s volume can be set and the
sound can be muted using the TV’s remote
control.

• When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an
operation that produces sound from the TV
is performed from the TV’s menu screen,
etc.

• When the TV’s power is set to standby, the
receiver’s power is also set to standby.
(Only when the input for a component
connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching
the TV)

63
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 64 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

Chapter 8:

Using other functions
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound
settings you can make using the AUDIO
PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated,
are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the
AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is
unavailable due to the current source,
settings and status of the receiver.

1 Press RECEIVER , then press AUDIO
PARAMETER.
2 Use / to select the setting you want to
adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the
receiver, certain options may not be able to be
selected. Check the table below for notes on
this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for
each setting.
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the
menu.

Setting

What it does

MCACC
(MCACC preset)

Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset
memories are saved. When a MCACC preset memory has been
renamed, the given name is displayed.

Option(s)

EQ
(Acoustic
Calibration EQ)

Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro.

S-WAVE
(Standing Wave)

Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control.

DELAY
(Sound Delay)

Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding
a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation
of the video.

MIDNIGHT

Allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low
volumes.

MIDNIGHT/
LOUDNESS OFF

LOUDNESS

Used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low
volumes.

LOUDNESS ON

TONEb
(Tone Control)

Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.

M1. MEMORY 1 to
M6. MEMORY 6
Default:
M1. MEMORY 1
ON
OFFa
ON
OFF
0.0 to 10.0 (frames)
1 second = 30
frames (NTSC)
Default: 0.0

MIDNIGHT ON

64
En

BYPASS
ON

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 65 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

Setting

What it does

BASSc

Adjusts the amount of bass.

Option(s)
–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)

TREBLEc

Adjusts the amount of treble.

–6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)

S.RTRV
(Sound Retriever)

With the Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to
compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression,
improving the sound’s sense of density and modulation.

OFFd

DNR
(Digital Noise
Reduction)

May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example,
video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.

OFF

DIALOG E.
(Dialog
Enhancement)

Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from
other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack.

OFF

DUAL
(Dual Mono)

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks
should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes
necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate
channels.

CH1 – Channel 1 is
heard only

CH2 – Channel 2 is
heard only
CH1 CH2 – Both
channels heard from
front speakers

DRC
(Dynamic Range
Control)

Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use
this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).

AUTOe

Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass
tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low
bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the
recommended value. When set to –5 dB, –10 dB, –15 dB or –20
dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is
selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.

0dB/ –5dB/ –10dB/
–15dB/ –20dB

MAX
MID
OFF

LFE
(LFE Attenuate)

SACD GAINf

Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).

OFF

0dB
+6 dB

HDMIg
(HDMI Audio)

Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or flat panel TV. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from this receiver.

AMPLIFIER

A. DELAY
(Auto delay)

This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay
between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio
delay time is set depending on the operational status of the
display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is
automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.h

OFF

THROUGH

65
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 66 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

Setting

What it does

Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the
C. WIDTHi
center channel between the front right and left speakers, making
(Center Width)
it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
(Applicable only
when using a center
speaker)

Option(s)
0 to 7
Default: 3

DIMENSIONi

Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to
back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more
forward (positive settings).

–3 to +3
Default: 0

PANORAMAi

Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers
for a ‘wraparound’ effect.

OFF

C. IMAGEj
(Center Image)
(Applicable only
when using a center
speaker)

Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front
right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center
speaker only).

0 to 10
Defaults:
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10

EFFECT

Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround
or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).

10 to 90

a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.
b.This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is Stereo, Auto surround (STEREO) or ALC (STEREO).
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
d.With the iPod/USB input function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.
e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby
TrueHD.
f. You shouldn’t have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the
gain setting back to 0 dB.
g.• HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
• The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receiver’s HDMI audio and video input signals
from the TV with the receiver’s power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp mode on page 63.
h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability
(‘lipsync’) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay
time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.

66
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 67 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture
settings you can make using the VIDEO
PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated,
are listed in bold.
Important
• Note that if an option cannot be selected
on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is
unavailable due to the current source,
setting and status of the receiver.
• These functions do not affect HDMI inputs.

1 Press RECEIVER , then press VIDEO
PARAMETER.
2 Use / to select the setting you want to
adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the
receiver, certain options may not be able to be
selected. Check the table below for notes on
this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for
each setting.1
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the
menu.

Setting

What it does

V. CONV
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks
(Digital Video Conversion) (including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 22).
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when analog
RESa (Resolution)
video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select
*VSX-1019AH model only
this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images
you wish to watch).

Option(s)
ON
OFF
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p

Specifies the aspect ratio when analog video input signals are
ASPb (Aspect)
output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while
*VSX-1019AH model only
checking each setting on your display (if the image doesn’t match
your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).
IP CONVc,d
(I/P Converter)
*VSX-919AH model only

480i/576i analog video signals are converted to progressive
signals for output.
When set to AUTO, the signals are output with the optimum
setting for the connected display by HDMI.
When set to ON, the signals are up-converted to 480p/576p for
output.
When set to OFF, the signals are not converted for output.

THROUGH
NORMAL

AUTO
ON
OFF

Note
1 • All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
• Setting items other than V. CONV can only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON.

67
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 68 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

Setting

What it does

PCINEMAc,e
(PureCinema)

This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set to AUTO; but try
switching to OFF if the picture appears unnatural.
Additionally, certain PAL movie video (576i, 25 frames/second
STB video output or DVD disc playback, etc.) that contain film
progressive material cannot be recognized as such by this
receiver. In such instances, if you choose PAL, PureCinema mode
is activated.

Option(s)
AUTO

P.MOTIONc
(Progressive Motion)

Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is

set to progressive.

–4 to +4
Default: 0

YNRc

Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.

0 to +8
Default: 0

DETAILc

Adjusts how sharp edges appear.

–4 to +4
Default: 0

SHARPc,f
(Sharpness)

Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements
in the picture.

–4 to +4
Default: 0

BRIGHTc
(Brightness)

Adjusts the overall brightness.

–6 to +6
Default: 0

CONTRASTc

Adjusts the contrast between light and dark.

–6 to +6
Default: 0

HUEc

Adjusts the red/green balance.

–6 to +6
Default: 0

CHROMAc
(Chroma Level)

Adjusts saturation from dull to bright.

–6 to +6
Default: 0

PAL
OFF

a.• When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases
no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.
• When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)
connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (At this
time, video signals are only output from the same type of terminals to which they were input).
• When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are
input, 480p/576p signals are output from the component output terminals.
b.• If the image doesn’t match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor.
• NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.
c.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are being input.
d.If the picture does not display properly when AUTO or PAL is selected, select OFF.
e.If the picture does not display properly when PAL is selected, select AUTO or OFF.
f. This setting is ineffective for HDMI output, from composite and component video inputs.

68
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 69 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

Switching the speaker system

Using the MULTI-ZONE controls

If you selected Speaker B in Surround back
speaker setting on page 94, three speaker
system settings are possible using SPEAKERS.
If you selected Normal, Front Bi-Amp or
ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your
main speaker system on or off. The options
below are for the Speaker B setting only.1

The following steps use the front panel controls
to adjust the sub zone volume and select
sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on
page 70.

• Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to
select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected
Normal, the button will simply switch your
main speaker system (A) on or off.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system
option:
• SPA – Sound is output from speaker
system A and the same signal is output
from the pre-out terminals.
• SPB – Sound is output from the two
speakers connected to speaker system B.
Multichannel sources will not be heard.
The same signal is output from the
surround back channel pre-out terminals.
• SPAB – Sound is output from speaker
system A (up to 5 channels, depending on
the source), the two speakers in speaker
system B, and the subwoofer. The sound
from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A
(multichannel sources will be downmixed
to 2 channels).
• SP (off) – No sound is output from the
speakers. The same sound is output from
the pre-out terminals (including from your
subwoofer, if connected) as when
selecting speaker system A (above).

1 Press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF button
on the front panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
• ZONE 2 ON – Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature on
• MULTI ZONE OFF – Switches the MULTIZONE feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the
MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the
front panel.
• When the receiver is on,2 make sure that
any operations for the sub zone are done
while ZONE 2 shows in the display. If this is
not showing, the front panel controls affect
the main zone only.
3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select
the source for the sub zone.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source
connected to the CD-R inputs to the sub room
(ZONE 2).
• If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner
controls to select a preset station (see
Saving station presets on page 52 if you’re
unsure how to do this).3
• VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB and
SIRIUS Radio function cannot be selected
for the MULTI-ZONE feature.

Note
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 94. However, if SPB is
selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 94 output from the surround back pre-out
terminals may change.
• All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE 2 DVD for example shows in the display.
3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also
changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.

69
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 70 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust
the volume for the sub zone.
This is only possible if you selected the
Variable volume control in ZONE Audio Setup
on page 99.1
5 When you’re finished, press MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL again to return to the main zone
controls.
You can also press the MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF
button on the front panel to switch off all
output to the sub zone.2

MULTI-ZONE remote controls
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2
to operate the corresponding zone.
The following table shows the possible MULTIZONE remote controls:
Button

What it does



Switches on/off power in the sub
zone.

INPUT
SELECT

Use to select the input function in
the sub zone.

Input
function
buttons

Use to select the input function
directly (this may not work for some
functions) in the sub zone.

MASTER
VOLUME
+/–

Use to set the listening volume in the
sub zone.

Making an audio or a video
recording
You can make an audio or a video recording
from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or
video source connected to the receiver (such
as a CD player or TV).3
Keep in mind you can’t make a digital
recording from an analog source or vice-versa,
so make sure the components you are
recording to/from are hooked up in the same
way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 14 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when
making recordings (from the video OUT jacks)
make sure to use the same type of video cable
for connecting your recorder as you used to
connect your video source (the one you want to
record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using Component video
if your source has also been connected using
Component video.
For more information about video connections,
see Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and
other video sources on page 28.
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT
SELECT).
• If necessary, press RECEIVER , then press
SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal
corresponding to the source component
(see Choosing the input signal on page 58
for more on this).
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video,
DVD etc.

Note
1 The volume levels of the main and sub zone are independent.
2 • You won’t be able to switch the main zone off completely unless you’ve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
• If you don’t plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so
that this receiver is in standby.
3 • The receiver’s volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on
the recorded signal.
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.

70
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 71 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the
recording device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most
video recorders set the audio recording level
automatically—check the component’s
instruction manual if you’re unsure.
4 Start recording, then start playback of the
source component.

Reducing the level of an analog
signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of
an analog signal when it’s too strong. You can
use this if you find that the OVER indicator
lights often or you can hear distortion in the
sound.1
• Press RECEIVER , then press A.ATT to
switch the input attenuator on or off.

Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into
standby after a specified amount of time so you
can fall asleep without worrying about the
receiver being left on all night. Use the remote
control to set the sleep timer.
• Press RECEIVER , then press SLEEP
repeatedly to set the sleep time.
30 min

60 min

Off

90 min

Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels
for the front panel display. Note that when
selecting sources, the display automatically
brightens for a few seconds.
• Press RECEIVER , then press DIMMER
repeatedly to change the brightness of the
front panel display.

Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your
current settings for features such as surround
back channel processing and your current
MCACC preset.
1 Press RECEIVER , then press STATUS to
check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.3
The front panel display shows each of the
following settings for three seconds each:
Input function
↓
Sampling Frequency
↓
Surround Back channel Processing
↓
MCACC preset
↓
ZONE 2 input
↓
KURO LINK

2 When you’re finished, press STATUS
again to switch off the display.

• You can check the remaining sleep time at
any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing
repeatedly will cycle through the sleep
options again.2
Note
1 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
2 • You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
• The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.

71
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 72 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Using other functions

Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s
settings to the factory default. Use the front panel
controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.
• Disconnect the iPod and USB memory
device from the receiver beforehand.
1

Setting
KURO LINK
DSP
Surround back channel
Processing
Phase Control
Sound Retriever iPod/USB

3 Select ‘RESET’ using PRESET +/–, then
press ENTER on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
4 Press ENTER to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver
has been reset to the factory default settings.
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if
the receiver is unplugged.

Other functions

Sound Delay
Dual Mono
DRC
SACD Gain
LFE Attenuate
Auto delay
UP Mix
Digital Safety
Effect Level
2 PL II Music
Options

Default system settings
Setting
Default
Digital Video Conversion
ON
SPEAKERS
A
Surround Back System
Normal
Speaker System Front
SMALL
Center
SMALL
Surr
SMALL
SB
SMALLx2
SW
YES
Crossover
80 Hz
X-Curve
OFF
DIMMER
brightest
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on
page 40.
MULTI-ZONE
Zone 2 Volume Level
Variable
Zone 2 Volume
–60 dB
HDMI
HDMI Audio
Amp

72
En

ON
ON
ON

function

Switch the receiver into standby.

2 While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press  STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET  NO .

Default
ON

Neo:6 Options
All Inputs

ExtendedStereo
Other modes
Center Width
Dimension
Panorama
Center Image

OFF
0.0 frame
CH1
AUTO
0 dB
0 dB
OFF
ON
OFF
90
50
3
0
OFF
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
AUTO
SURROUND
AUTO
SURROUND
STEREO

Listening Mode
(2 ch)
Listening Mode
(x ch)
Listening Mode
(HP)
See also Setting the Audio options on page 64 for
other default DSP settings.
MCACC
MCACC Position Memory
M1: MEMORY 1
Channel Level (M1 to M6)
0.0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6)
10’00”
Standing Wave ATT of all
0.0 dB
(M1 to M6)
channels/filters
SWch Wide
0.0 dB
Trim
EQ Data (M1 to All channels/
0.0 dB
M6)
bands
EQ Wide Trim
0.0 dB

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 73 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

Chapter 9:

Controlling the rest of your
system
Operating multiple receivers
The remote control included with this receiver
can be used to operate up to three other
receivers (of the same model as this receiver)
in addition to this receiver. The receiver to be
operated is switched by inputting the preset
code to set the remote control setting.
• Set the remote modes on the receivers
before using this function (see Remote
Control Mode Setup on page 101).
1 Check the operation selector switch to
MAIN.
2

Press RECEIVER .

Setting the remote to control
other components
Most components can be assigned to one of
the input function buttons (such as DVD or
CD) using the component’s manufacturer
preset code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain
functions may be controllable after assigning
the proper preset code, or the codes for the
manufacturer in the remote control will not
work for the model that you are using.
Note

3 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then
release it after the LED flashes twice.

• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by
pressing RECEIVER . To go back a step,
press RETURN.

4 Use the number buttons to enter the 5digit preset code (see below).
• Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)

• After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.

• Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0
• Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1

Selecting preset codes directly

When the preset code is fully input, the LED
flashes once to indicate that the setting is
completed.

1 Press the input function button for the
component you want to control.1
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL,
press TV CTRL here.

To operate another receiver, start over from
step 1 to input its preset code.

2 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then
release it after the LED flashes twice.

• Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2

3 Use the number buttons to enter the 5digit preset code.
See Preset code list on page 116.

Note
1 You can’t assign RECEIVER , TUNER, iPod/USB or SIRIUS.

73
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 74 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

When the preset code is fully input, the LED
flashes once to indicate that the setting is
completed.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other
components you want to control.
To try out the remote control, switch the
component on or off (into standby) by pressing
 SOURCE. If it doesn’t seem to work, select
the next code from the list (if there is one).

Resetting the remote control
presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset
codes and programmed buttons.
1 Check the operation selector switch to
MAIN.
2

Press RECEIVER .

Controls the components
This remote control can control components
after entering the proper codes or teaching the
receiver the commands (see Setting the remote
to control other components on page 73 for
more on this). Use the input function buttons
to select the component.
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote
control are dedicated to control the TV
assigned to the TV CTRL button. If you have
two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL
button.
RECEIVER

SOURCE

DVD

DVR

HDMI

CD-R

VIDEO

iPod USB TUNER

SIRIUS

INPUT
SELECT

3 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then
release it after the LED flashes twice.
4 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.
The LED flashes four times to indicate that the
resetting is completed.

SIGNAL SEL

MCACC

SLEEP

SBch

A.ATT

DIMMER

D.ACCESS

CH LEVEL

CLASS

ENTER

INPUT

MASTER
VOLUME

TV CONTROL

Default preset codes
Input function Preset code
button

DVD

31571

VOL

MUTE

AUDIO
PARAMETER

VIDEO
PARAMETER

TUNE

LIST

TOOLS

TOP MENU
BAND

T.EDIT
GUIDE

ENTER

PRESET

32442
CATEGORY

DVR

22306

HDMI

32442

14001

70468

CD-R

71087

VIDEO

20058

TV CTRL

14001

RECEIVER

61935

RETURN
HOME
MENU

TUNE

iPod CTRL

AUTO/ALC/
MENU
DIRECT STEREO STANDARD ADV SURR
HDD

DVD

ANT

MPX

AUDIO

INFO

PHASE CTRL

STATUS

PQLS

MEMORY

DISP
TV CTRL RECEIVER
REMOTE
SETUP

MAIN

ZONE 2

RECEIVER

74
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 75 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

Button(s)

TV (Monitor)

BD/DVD

HDD/DVR

VCR

SAT/CATV

 SOURCE

POWER ON/
OFF

Number
buttons

numerics

• (dot)

KURO LINK

CLEAR



ENTER
(CLASS)

ENTER

CH ENTER

ENTER

EXIT/INFO

EXIT

TOP MENU

LIST

TOOLS/
GUIDE/EPG

USER MENU

TOOLS

GUIDE

///

ENTER

HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU

HOME/
MENU

RETURN

HDD (Red)

Red

HDD

Red

DVD (Green)

Green

DVD

Green

(Yellow)

Yellow

VCR

Yellow

(Blue)

Blue





AUTO SETUP 





FREEZE









ANT

AV SELECTION 





SCREEN SIZE 



AUDIO

DISP

DISPLAY

DISPLAY/
INFO

CH +/–

CH+/-

+

RECORD

75
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 76 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Controlling the rest of your system

Button(s)
 SOURCE
Number
buttons
• (dot)
ENTER
(CLASS)

MD/DAT

TAPE

Button(s)

TV
(Projector)

POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/ POWER ON/
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF

 SOURCE

POWER ON

MOVIE

numerics

STANDARD

DYNAMIC

USER1

USER2

USER3

COLOR+

MS

SHARP+

///

GAMMA

COLOR-

• (dot)

SHARP-

numerics

>10/CLEAR

CLEARb

CLEAR

ENTER

DISK/ENTER

OPEN/CLOSEb

ENTER

TOP MENU

MS

+10

/// ///
ENTER

CD/CD-R/
SACD

LEGATO LINKa -

ENTER

SACD SETUPa

ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP
RETURN







///



ENTER







AUDIO

PURE AUDIOa -

DISP

DISPLAY/
INFO

TIMEa

a. Controls for SACD.
b. Controls for MD.

76
En

EXIT
INFO

TEST
HIDE
MENU


HDMI1



HDMI2



COMP.



VIDEO



S-VIDEO



BRIGHT-



BRIGHT+

AUDIO

POWER OFF

DISP

ASPECT

CH +/–

CONTRAST+/-

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 77 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Chapter 10:

The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel
ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in
Pioneer’s laboratories with the aim of making it
possible for home users to perform
adjustments of the same level as in a studio
easily and with high precision. The acoustic
characteristics of the listening environment
are measured and the frequency response is
calibrated accordingly to allow high precision,
automatic analysis and optimal calibration of
the sound field to bring it closer to a studio
environment than ever before. Furthermore,
while it was previously difficult to eliminate
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with
a standing wave control function using a
unique process to perform acoustic analysis
and reduce their influence.
This section describes how to calibrate the
sound field automatically and fine-adjust the
sound field data manually.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use  RECEIVER to switch on.1
• If headphones are connected to the
receiver, disconnect them.
2 Press RECEIVER on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.2
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the
HOME MENU.

3 Select ‘Advanced MCACC’ from the
HOME MENU, then press ENTER.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup

Exit

Return

Select the setting you want to adjust.
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo

Exit

Return

• Full Auto MCACC – See Automatically
setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 37 for a quick and
effective automatic surround setup.
• Auto MCACC – See Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 78 for a more detailed
MCACC setup.
• Manual MCACC – Fine-tunes your speaker
settings and customize the Acoustic
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup
on page 82).
• Demo – No settings are saved and no
errors occur. When the speakers are
connected to this receiver, the test tone is
output repeatedly. Press RETURN to
cancel the test tone.

Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU.
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected. When you set ZONE
2 to ON (page 69), you can’t use the HOME MENU.

77
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 78 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings
than those provided in Automatically setting up
for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37,
you can customize your setup options below.
You can calibrate your system differently for up
to six different MCACC presets1, which are
useful if you have different listening positions
depending on the type of source (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video
game close to the TV).2

1 Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the Advanced
MCACC menu, then press ENTER.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not
displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 77.
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo

1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
ALL

Speaker Setting
Channel Level
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
Speaker Distance
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
EQ Pro & S-Wave
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3 Return
THX Speaker :
NO

Exit

START

Important
• Make sure the microphone/speakers are
not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will
overwrite any existing settings for the
MCACC preset you select.3
• The screen saver will automatically appear
after five minutes of inactivity.

Exit

Return

2 Select the parameters you want to set.
Use / to select the item, then use / to
set.
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
ALL
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker :
NO

CAUTION

Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave

1b.Auto MCACC

START

A/V RECEIVER
ALL

• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC
Setup are output at high volume.

Exit

Speaker Setting
Channel Level
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
Speaker Distance
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2 Return
EQ Pro & S-Wave
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker :
NO
START

THX®
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights
reserved.

Exit

Return

Note
1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management
on page 91.
2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re
using your system.
3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).

78
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 79 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

• Auto MCACC – The default is ALL
(recommended), but you can limit the
system calibration to only one setting (to
save time) if you want.1 The available
options are ALL, Keep SP System,2
Speaker Setting, Channel Level,
Speaker Distance and EQ Pro & S-Wave.
• EQ Type (only available when the Auto
MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave)
– This determines how the frequency
balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of
the following three correction curves can be
stored separately in the MCACC memory.
SYMMETRY (default) implements symmetric
correction for each pair of left and right
speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a ‘flat’ setting
where all the speakers are set individually so
no special weighting is given to any one
channel. FRONT ALIGN3 sets all speakers in
accordance with the front speaker settings (no
equalization is applied to the front left and right
channels).
• THX Speaker (only available when the
Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or
Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you are
using THX speakers (set all speakers to
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.
• STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available
when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ
Pro & S-Wave) – In addition to
measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for
which test tones will be analyzed for
standing waves. This is useful if you want to
get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration for several

seating positions in your listening area.4
Place the microphone at the reference
point indicated on-screen and note the last
microphone placement will be at your main
listening position:
2nd reference
point

3rd reference
point

Main listening
position

3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
• Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the
speakers and the microphone.
USB

SPEAKERS

USB

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MCACC
SETUP MIC

MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL
ON / OFF

iPod
iPhone

VIDEO

VIDEO INPUT
L AUDIO

MASTER
VOLUME

MCACC
SETUP MIC

If you have a tripod, use it to place the
microphone so that it’s about ear level at your
normal listening position. Otherwise, place the
microphone at ear level using a table or a chair.

Note
1 • The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 86 for more on this.
• Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the
respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 64.
2 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 95)
unchanged.
3 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL
CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.
4 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.

79
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 80 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

4 When you’re finished settings the
options, select START then press ENTER.
5

Follow the instructions on-screen.
• Make sure the microphone is connected.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is
automatically detected every time you
switch on the system. Make sure it is on
and the volume is turned up.
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC
Setup on page 39 for notes regarding high
background noise levels and other possible
interference.

6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs test tones to determine the
speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
quiet as possible while it’s doing this.
• Do not adjust the volume during the test
tones. This may result in incorrect speaker
settings.
• With error messages (such as Too much
ambient noise! or Check microphone)
select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup on page 39) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesn’t seem to be
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT
and continue.

7 If necessary, confirm the speaker
configuration in the GUI screen.1
The configuration shown on-screen should
reflect the actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds
while the speaker configuration check screen
is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will
resume automatically. In this case, you don’t
need to select ‘OK’ and press ENTER in step 8.
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...

2/10

Environment Check
Ambient Noise
: OK
Microphone
:
Speaker YES/NO :

1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exit

L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
10
OK
Exit

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES

Cancel

RETRY
Cancel

• If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isn’t correct), there
may be a problem with the speaker
connection.
If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off
the power and check the speaker
connections. If there doesn’t seem to be a
problem, you can simply use / to select
the speaker and / to change the
setting and continue.
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, the
speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted.
Check the speaker connections.2
If the connections were wrong, turn off the
power, disconnect the power cable, then
reconnect properly. After this, perform the
Full Auto MCACC procedure again.

Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly
connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.

80
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 81 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

8 Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press
ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs more test tones to
determine the optimum receiver settings for
channel level, speaker distance, and Acoustic
Calibration EQ.
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...

Subwoofer Check :

1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Now Analyzing...

Exit

Surround Analysis
Speaker System
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
Standing Wave
Reverb
Aco Cal EQ Pro
Exit

5/10

: OK
:
:
:
:
:

Cancel

Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this
is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
• If you selected a STAND.WAVE MultiPoint setup (in step 2), you will be asked to
place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference
points before finally placing it at your main
listening position.

You can also choose to view the settings by
selecting individual parameters from the
MCACC Data Check screen:
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of
speakers you’ve connected (see page 95
for more on this)
• Channel Level – The overall balance of
your speaker system (see page 83 or 96 for
more on this)
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your
speakers from the listening position (see
page 83 or 97 for more on this)2
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control
lower ‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 85 for
more on this)
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the
frequency balance of your speaker system
based on the acoustic characteristics of
your room (see page 85 for more on this)
Press RETURN after you have finished checking
each screen. When you’re finished, select
RETURN to go back to the HOME MENU.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from
this receiver upon completion of the Auto
MCACC Setup.

9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is
completed and the Advanced MCACC menu
reappears automatically.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
should give you excellent surround sound from
your system, but it is also possible to adjust
these settings manually using the Manual
MCACC setup menu (starting below) or
Manual SP Setup menu (starting on
page 94).1

Note
1 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm (5
inches) will end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup
on page 94.
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
• If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are
cases where (for optimal surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.

81
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 82 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual
MCACC setup menu to make detailed
adjustments when you’re more familiar with
the system. Before making these settings, you
should have already completed Automatically
setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37.
You only need to make these settings once
(unless you change the placement of your
current speaker system or add new speakers).

1 Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the
Advanced MCACC menu.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu on page 77 if you’re not already
at this screen.
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
a. Full Auto MCACC
b. Auto MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo

1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional

Return

CAUTION
Exit

• The test tones used in the Manual MCACC
setup are output at high volume.
Important
• You will need to first specify the MCACC
preset you want to adjust by pressing
MCACC before pressing HOME MENU
(step 2 in Making receiver settings from the
Advanced MCACC menu on page 77).
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have
to connect the setup microphone to the
front panel and place it about ear level at
your normal listening position. Press
HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU
before you connect the microphone to this
receiver. If the microphone is connected
while the HOME MENU is not being
displayed, the display will change to the
Full Auto MCACC under Advanced
MCACC.
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC
Setup on page 39 for notes regarding high
background noise levels and other possible
interference.
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on
and turn up the volume to the middle
position.

82
En

Return

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might
want to make these settings in order.
• Fine Channel Level – Make fine
adjustments to the overall balance of your
speaker system (see Fine Channel Level on
page 83).
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay
settings for your speaker system (see Fine
Speaker Distance on page 83).
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant
low frequencies in your listening room (see
Standing Wave on page 85).
The last two settings are specifically for
customizing the parameters explained in
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85:
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency
balance of your speaker system while
listening to test tones (see Acoustic
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85).
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the
speakers and make detailed settings
according to your room’s reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration
EQ Professional on page 86).

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 83 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Fine Channel Level
• Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by
properly adjusting the overall balance of your
speaker system. You can adjust the Channel
Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The
following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using
the Manual speaker setup on page 94.
1 Select ‘Fine Channel Level’ from the
Manual MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference
level.
1c.Manual MCACC

3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the
levels (+/–10.0 dB) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker
you selected to match the reference speaker.
When it sounds like both tones are the same
volume, press  to confirm and continue to
the next channel.
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
L

R <=> L
:
0.0 dB

R
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SW

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB

Exit

Finish

• For comparison purposes, the reference
speaker will change depending on which
speaker you select.

A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional

• If you want to go back and adjust a
channel, simply use / to select it.

1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
CAUTION
Exit

Return
Loud test tones will
be output.

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.

Please wait...**

Exit

Cancel

Fine Speaker Distance
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you
may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so
that you’ll have plenty of room to adjust the
other speaker levels.
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Reference Ch :
Ref.Ch Level :

Exit

L
0.0 dB

• Default setting: 10’00’’ (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with
your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit
of delay to some speakers so that all sounds
will arrive at the listening position at the same
time. You can adjust the distance of each
speaker in half inch increments. The following
setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using
the Manual speaker setup on page 94.

Cancel

• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be
output.

83
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 84 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

1 Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the
Manual MCACC setup menu.
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional

When it sounds like the delay settings are
matched up, press  to confirm and continue
to the next channel.

1c2.Fine SP Distance
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Reference Ch :
Ref.Ch Distance :

Exit

L
10’00”

Return

• For comparison purposes, the reference
speaker will change depending on which
speaker you select.

Exit

Cancel

2 Adjust the distance of the left channel
from the listening position.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the
distance as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker
you selected to match the reference speaker.
The delay is measured in terms of speaker
distance from 0’00-1/2’’ to 45’00’’.

• If you want to go back and adjust a
channel, simply use / to select it.
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.

1c2.Fine SP Distance
A/V RECEIVER
L

R <=> L
:
10’10”

R
C
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
SW

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Exit

9’10”
10’10”
9’00”
9’00”
6’00”
6’00”
12’10”
Finish

Listen to the reference speaker and use it to
measure the target channel. From the listening
position, face the two speakers with your arms
outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to
make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in
front of you and between your arm span.1

Note
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your
speakers very slightly.
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other
speakers). Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the
low frequency response of the reference speaker).

84
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 85 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Standing Wave
• Default setting: ON1/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under
certain conditions, sound waves from your
speaker system resonate mutually with sound
waves reflected off the walls in your listening
area. This can have a negative effect on the
overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement,
your listening position, and ultimately the
shape of your room, it results in an overly
resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The Standing Wave
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly
resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the
filters used for Standing Wave Control for each
of your MCACC presets.2
1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual
MCACC setup menu.
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional

1c3.Standing Wave
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

MCACC

Filter 3

Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT TRIM
[Hz]

M1.MEMORY1

Filter 2

Filter 1

Filter
Channel

[dB]

5.0

[Hz]

[dB]

10 120 5.0

10
Return

[Hz]

201 5.0

[dB]

+10.0

dB
0
5
10
16

Exit

125

250

500

1k Hz

Finish

2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing
Wave Control.
• Filter Channel – Select the channel to
which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all
except center channel and subwoofer),
Center or SW (subwoofer).

• TRIM (only available when the filter channel
above is SW) – Adjust the subwoofer
channel level (to compensate for the
difference in output post-filter).
• Freq / Q / ATT – These are the filter
parameters where Freq represents the
frequency you will be targeting and Q is the
bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower
the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the
targeted frequency).
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.

Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
• Default setting: ON3/0.0dB (all channels/
bands)
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of
room equalizer for your speakers (excluding
the subwoofer). It works by measuring the
acoustic characteristics of your room and
neutralizing the ambient characteristics that
can color the original source material
(providing a ‘flat’ equalization setting). If you’re
not satisfied with the adjustment provided in
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic
MCACC (Expert) on page 78, you can also
adjust these settings manually to get a
frequency balance that suits your tastes.

Note
1 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu.
See Setting the Audio options on page 64 for more on this.
2 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup
to another MCACC preset.
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
• When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO
PARAMETER, STAND.WAVE ON is automatically selected.
3 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ
ON is automatically selected.

85
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 86 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

1 Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual
MCACC setup menu.
1c.Manual MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional

Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of
room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate
your system based on the direct sound coming
from the speakers.

How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional
Exit

Return

2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust
to your liking.
1c4.EQ Adjust
A/V RECEIVER
dB

Ch :

0.0

-8.0 -6.0

0.0

+3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0

125

250

500

[Hz]

0.0

MCACC
M1.MEMORY1

Exit

16k TRIM
[Hz]

Finish

Use / to select the channel.
Use / to select the frequency and / to
boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go
back to the top of the screen and press  to
return to Ch, then use / to select the channel.
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if
the frequency adjustment is too drastic
and might distort. If this happens, bring the
level down until OVER! disappears from
the display.
Tip
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel
too drastically will affect the overall balance.
If the speaker balance seems uneven, you
can raise or lower channel levels using test
tones with the TRIM feature. Use / to
select TRIM, then use / to raise or lower
the channel level for the current speaker.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.

86
En

If you find that lower frequencies seem overly
reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it
sounds ‘boomy’), or that different channels
seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics
(when Type A or Type B shown on the diagrams
on the following applies), select EQ Pro. & SWave (or ALL) for the Auto MCACC setting in
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 to
calibrate the room automatically.
• Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low
frequencies
Low frequencies

Level

High frequencies

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro
calibration range
0

Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range

160
Time (in msec)

• Type B: Reverb characteristics for
different channels
Front L

Level

Front R

Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro
calibration range
0

Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range

160
Time (in msec)

If the pattern is as shown above, select the 3050ms setting. If not, this setting is not
necessary.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 87 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1

Select ‘EQ Professional’, then press ENTER.

3 If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’,
select EQ ON or OFF, and then START.
1c5a.Reverb Measurement
A/V RECEIVER

1c.Manual MCACC

MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Reverb Measure with :
EQ OFF

A/V RECEIVER
1. Fine Channel Level
2. Fine SP Distance
3. Standing Wave
4. EQ Adjust
5. EQ Professional

START

1c5.EQ Professional
A/V RECEIVER
a. Reverb Measurement
b. Reverb View
c. Advanced EQ Setup
Exit

Exit

Cancel

Return

Select an option and press ENTER.
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to
measure the reverb characteristics of your
room.
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified
frequency ranges in each channel.1
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select
the time period that will be used for
frequency adjustment and calibration,
based on the reverb measurement of your
listening area. Note that customizing
system calibration using this setup will
alter the settings you made in
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 and
is not necessary if you’re satisfied with
these settings.

The following options determine how the
reverb characteristics of your listening area are
displayed in Reverb View:
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb
characteristics of your listening area
without the equalization performed by this
receiver (before calibration).
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb
characteristics of your listening area with
the equalization performed by this receiver
(after calibration).2 Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due
to adjustments necessary for your listening
area.3
When the reverb measurement is finished, you
can select Reverb View to see the results onscreen. See Professional Calibration EQ
graphical output on page 107 for
troubleshooting information.

Note
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37 or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may
appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves
controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves
eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the
standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you
wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using
the Reverb Measurement function.
2 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use
another MCACC preset, exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.
3 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb
characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics
after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.

87
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 88 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

4 If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can
check the reverb characteristics for each
channel. Press RETURN when you’re done.

time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the
speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms
setting.

1c5b.Reverb View
A/V RECEIVER
Channel
:
Frequency :
Calibration :
16 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
500 Hz
250 Hz
125 Hz
63 Hz

1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup

M1.MEMORY 1
SYMMETRY

A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Time Position
:
30-50ms
EQ Type
:
SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point :
NO

dB
63.0
61.0
59.0
57.0

1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup

55.0
53.0
0

Exit

Front
63Hz
After

120

160 ms

Return
Exit

The reverb characteristics are displayed when
the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb
Measurement measurements are
conducted.1
Use / to select the channel, frequency
and calibration setting you want to check. Use
/ to go back and forth between the three.
The reverb characteristics graph before and
after EQ calibration can be displayed by
selecting Calibration : Before / After.2 Note
that the markers on the vertical axis indicate
decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If ‘Advanced EQ Setup’ is selected, select
the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter
the desired time setting for calibration, and
then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you
can choose the time period that will be used for
the final frequency adjustment and calibration.
Even though you can make this setting without
reverb measurement, it is best to use the
measurement results as a reference for your

A/V RECEIVER
START
MCACC
: M1.MEMORY 1
Time Position
:
30-50ms
EQ Type
:
SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point :
NO
Cancel

START

Exit

Cancel

Use / to select the setting. Use / to
switch between them.
Select the setting from the following time
periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,
20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and
60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all
channels during calibration.
When you’re finished, select START. It will take
about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is
set, you are given the option to check the
settings on-screen.

Note
1 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL) function
shows the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.
2 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if
there is no reverb characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.

88
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 89 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Checking MCACC Data
At the procedure of Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37, the
procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 78 or after fine-adjusting at Manual
MCACC setup on page 82, you can check your
calibrated settings using the GUI screen.
1 Press RECEIVER , then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears
on your TV. Use /// and ENTER to
navigate through the screens and select menu
items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the
current menu.
2 Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the
HOME MENU.
HOME MENU

• Acoustic Cal EQ – Used to check the
calibration values of the listening
environment’s frequency response. See
Acoustic Cal EQ on page 90 for more on
this.
4 Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data
Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check
other settings.
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the HOME MENU.

Speaker Setting
Use this to display the speaker size and
number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on
page 95 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the MCACC
Data Check menu.

A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup

2a.Speaker Setting
A/V RECEIVER
Front
Center
Surr
SB
SW

2.MCACC Data Check
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

a. Speaker Setting
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Distance
d. Standing Wave
e. Acoustic Cal EQ

:
:
:
:
:

LARGE
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL x 2
YES

Return

Exit

Return

Select the setting you want to check.
• Speaker Setting – Used to check the
settings of the speaker systems. See
Speaker Setting below for more on this.
• Channel Level – Used to check the output
level of the different speakers. See Channel
Level below for more on this.

Return

2 Select the channel you want to check.
Use / to select the channel. The
corresponding channel on the layout diagram
is highlighted.

Channel Level
Use this to display the level of the various
channels. See Channel Level on page 96 for
more on this.

• Speaker Distance – Used to check the
distance to the different speakers. See
Speaker Distance on page 90 for more on
this.
• Standing Wave – Used to check the
standing wave control filter settings. See
Standing Wave on page 90 for more on this.

89
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 90 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the MCACC
Data Check menu.

1 Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the MCACC
Data Check menu.

2b.Channel Level

2d.Standing Wave

A/V RECEIVER

MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
0.0 dB

Exit

Filter 2

Filter 1

Filter
Channel

Filter 3

Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT Freq Q ATT TRIM
[Hz]

[dB]

5.0

[Hz]

[dB]

10 120 5.0

[Hz]

201 5.0

[dB]

+10.0

MCACC
M1.MEMORY1

0
5
10
16

Return

125

250

500

Exit

1k Hz

Return

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use /
to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
The level of the various channels set at the
selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
displayed for channels that are not connected.

2 When ‘Filter Channel’ is highlighted, use
/ to select the channel for which you
want to check standing wave control.
The standing wave related calibration value for
the selected channel stored at the selected
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.

Speaker Distance

3 Press  to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use
/ to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.

Use this to display the distance from the
different channels to the listening position. See
Speaker Distance on page 97 for more on this.
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
MCACC Data Check menu.
2c.Speaker Distance
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

10’10”
10’10”
9’10”
9’00”
6’00”
6’00”
9’00”
12’10”

Exit

Acoustic Cal EQ
Use this to display the calibration values for the
frequency response of the various channels set
in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 85 for more on
this.
1 Select ‘Acoustic Cal EQ’ from the MCACC
Data Check menu.
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ

Return

A/V RECEIVER
dB

Ch :

2 When ‘MCACC’ is highlighted, use /
to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
The distance from the various channels set at
the selected MCACC preset is displayed. ‘---’ is
displayed for channels that are not connected.

Standing Wave
Use this to display the standing wave related
adjustment values for the various MCACC
memories. See Standing Wave on page 85 for
more on this.

90
En

0.0

-8.0 -6.0

0.0

+3.0 +8.5 +8.5 +3.0

0.0

125

250

500

16k TRIM

[Hz]

MCACC
M1.MEMORY1

Exit

Return

2 When ‘Ch’ is highlighted, use / to
select the channel.
The calibration value for the frequency response
of the selected channel stored at the selected
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.
3 Press  to highlight ‘MCACC’, then use
/ to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 91 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six
MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your
system for different listening positions (or
frequency adjustments for the same listening
position).1 This is useful for alternate settings
to match the kind of source you’re listening to
and where you’re sitting (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video
game close to the TV).
From this menu you can copy from one preset to
another, name presets for easier identification
and clear any ones you don’t need.

• MCACC Memory Clear – Clear any
MCACC presets that you don’t want (see
Clearing MCACC presets on page 92).

Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets
that you’re using, you may want to rename
them for easier identification.
1 Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data
Management setup menu.
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear

3a.Memory Rename
A/V RECEIVER

1 Press RECEIVER , then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
2 Select ‘Data Management’ from the
HOME MENU.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup

A/V RECEIVER

Return

Exit

M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6

Exit

:
:
:
:
:
:

MEMORY 1
MEMORY 2
MEMORY 3
MEMORY 4
MEMORY 5
MEMORY 6

Return

Finish

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
rename, then select an appropriate preset
name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to
select a preset name.
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as
necessary, then press RETURN when you’re
finished.
You will return to the Data Management
setup menu.

3.Data Management
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
Exit

MCACC Position Rename

Return

Select the setting you want to adjust.
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC
presets for easy identification (see
Renaming MCACC presets below).
• MCACC Memory Copy – Copy settings
from one MCACC preset to another (see
Copying MCACC preset data on page 92).

Note
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 78, either of which you should have already completed.

91
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 92 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The Advanced MCACC menu

Copying MCACC preset data

Clearing MCACC presets

If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on
page 82), we recommend copying your current
settings1 to an unused MCACC preset. Instead
of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a
reference point from which to start.

If you are no longer using one of the MCACC
presets stored in memory, you can choose to
clear the calibration settings of that preset.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Copy’ from the
Data Management setup menu.

1 Select ‘MCACC Memory Clear’ from the
Data Management setup menu.
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear

3c.MCACC Memory Clear

3.Data Management

A/V RECEIVER

A/V RECEIVER
Clear

a. Memory Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Clear
Exit

3b.MCACC Memory Copy

M1.MEMORY 1

Return

A/V RECEIVER
Copy

Exit

All Data

From

M1.MEMORY 1

M1.MEMORY 1
Return

Exit

Cancel

Exit

Cancel

Select the setting you want to copy.
• All Data – Copies all the settings of the
selected MCACC preset memory.
• Level & Distance – Copies only the channel
level and speaker distance settings of the
selected MCACC preset memory.

3 Select the MCACC preset you’ll be
copying the settings ‘From’, then specify
where you want to copy them (‘To’).
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC
preset you’re currently using (this can’t be
undone).

2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
clear.
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset
you’re currently using (this can’t be undone).
3 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and clear the
preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
cleared.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared,
then you automatically return to the Data
Management setup menu.

4 Select ‘OK’ to confirm and copy the
settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
confirm the MCACC preset has been copied,
then you automatically return to the Data
Management setup menu.
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 78.

92
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 93 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

Chapter 11:

The system and the other setup
Making receiver settings from
the System Setup menu
The following section describes how to change
the speaker-related settings manually and
make various other settings (input selection,
OSD language selection, etc.).

Select the setting you want to adjust.
4.System Setup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup

Exit

1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the  RECEIVER button to switch on.1
• If headphones are connected to the
receiver, disconnect them.
2 Press RECEIVER , then press HOME
MENU.2
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
• Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the
HOME MENU.
3 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME
MENU, then press ENTER.
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Data Check
3. Data Management
4. System Setup

Exit

Return

• Manual SP Setup – Sets the type of
connection used for surround back
terminals and the size, number distance
and overall balance of the connected
speakers (see Manual speaker setup on
page 94).
• Input Setup – Specifies what you’ve
connected to the digital, HDMI and
component video inputs (see The Input
Setup menu on page 39).
• OSD Language – The GUI screen’s display
language can be changed (see Changing
the OSD display language (OSD Language)
on page 36).
• Other Setup – Makes customized settings
to reflect how you are using the receiver
(see The Other Setup menu on page 98).

Return

Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 You can’t use the HOME MENU when either the iPod/USB or SIRIUS Radio input function is selected or the
headphones are connected. When you set ZONE 2 to ON (page 69), you can’t use the HOME MENU.

93
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 94 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

• Channel Level – Adjusts the overall
balance of your speaker system (page 96).

Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed
settings to optimize the surround sound
performance. You only need to make these
settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your
system, but if you’re satisfied with the settings
made in Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37, it isn’t
necessary to make all of these settings.

• Speaker Distance – Specifies the distance
of your speakers from the listening position
(page 97).
• X-Curve – Adjusts the tonal balance of
your speaker system for movie soundtracks
(page 98).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each
setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after
each screen.

Surround back speaker setting
• Default setting: Normal

CAUTION
• The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup
are output at high volume.
1 Select ‘Manual SP Setup’, then press
ENTER.
See Making receiver settings from Making
receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 93 if you’re not already at this screen.
4.System Setup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup

There are several ways you can use the
surround back speaker channels with this
system. In addition to a normal home theater
setup where they are used for the surround
back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent
speaker system in another room.
1 Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System
Setup menu on page 93 if you’re not already at
this screen.

4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve

4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve

Return

4a1.Surr Back System
A/V RECEIVER
Exit

Normal

Return
Exit

2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
want to adjust these settings in order:
• Surr Back System – Specifies how you are
using your surround back speakers (see
below).
• Speaker Setting – Specifies the size and
number of speakers you’ve connected
(page 95).

94
En

Front
Center
Surr
SB

:
:
:
:

Normal
Normal
Normal
Normal

Return

Exit

Return

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 95 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

Select the surround back speaker setting.
• Normal – Select for normal home theater
use with surround back speakers in your
main (speaker system A) setup.
• Speaker B – Select to use the (surround
back) B speaker terminals to listen to
stereo playback in another room (see
Switching the speaker system on page 69).
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re
bi-amping your front speakers (see Biamping your speakers on page 20).
• ZONE 2 – Select to use the (surround back)
B speaker terminals for an independent
system in another zone (see Using the
MULTI-ZONE controls on page 69).

3 When ‘Setting Change?’ is displayed,
select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker
configuration (size, number of speakers and
crossover frequency)1. It is a good idea to make
sure that the settings made in Automatically
setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37 are correct. Note that this setting
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be
set independently.

1 Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve

4a2.Speaker Setting
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

Front
Center
Surr
SB
SW

:
:
:
:
:

X.OVER :

Exit

LARGE
SMALL
SMALL
SMALL x 2
YES

Return

80Hz

Return

2 Choose the set of speakers that you want
to set, then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of
each of the following speakers:2
• Front – Select LARGE if your front
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively, or if you didn’t connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass
frequencies to the subwoofer.
• Center – Select LARGE if your center
speaker reproduces bass frequencies
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is
sent to the front speakers).
• Surr – Select LARGE if your surround
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didn’t connect surround
speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front
speakers or a subwoofer).

Note
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center, surround
and surround back speakers can’t be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass
frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.

95
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 96 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

• SB – Select the number of surround back
speakers you have (one, two or none).1
Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your
surround back speakers reproduce bass
frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or
SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the
other speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t
connect surround back speakers choose
NO.
• SW – LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose
the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer
to output bass sound continuously or you
want deeper bass (the bass frequencies
that would normally come out the front and
center speakers are also routed to the
subwoofer).2 If you did not connect a
subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other
speakers).
3 Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover
frequency.3
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.

Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can
adjust the overall balance of your speaker
system, an important factor when setting up a
home theater system.
1 Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual
SP Setup menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve

4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC :
Exit

Test Tone

Exit

M1.MEMORY 1
:

AUTO
Return

Return

Select a setup option.
• MANUAL – Move the test tone manually
from speaker to speaker and adjust
individual channel levels.
• AUTO – Adjust channel levels as the test
tone moves from speaker to speaker
automatically.

Note
1 • If you selected Speaker B, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 94) you can’t adjust
the surround back settings.
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back
terminal.
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS
for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your
room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try
changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to
PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best.
If you’re having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for
the front speakers.
3 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the
subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for
bass sounds in the LFE channel.
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.

96
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 97 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

3 Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
CAUTION
Loud test tones will be output.

Please wait...**

Exit

Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from
your system, you need to specify the distance
of your speakers from the listening position.
The receiver can then add the proper delay
needed for effective surround sound.
1 Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the
Manual SP Setup menu.

Cancel

4 Adjust the level of each channel using /
.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch
speakers. The AUTO setup will output test
tones in the order shown on-screen:

4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve

4a4.Speaker Distance
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1

Exit

4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
Exit

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB
0.00 dB

L
C
R
SR
SBR
SBL
SL
SW
Exit

Finish

Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone
is emitted.1
5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• You can change the channel levels at any
time by press RECEIVER , then press CH
LEVEL, and then using / on the
remote control.

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

10’10”
9’50-1/2”
10’10”
9’00”
10’00”
10’00”
9’00”
12’10-1/2”

Return

Finish

2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using
/.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in
1/2 inch increments.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
• For best surround sound, make sure the
surround back speakers are the same
distance from the listening position.

Note
1 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust
the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual
soundtrack.

97
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 98 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too
bright when played back in large rooms. The XCurve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization
for home theater listening, and restores proper
tonal balance of movie soundtracks.
1 Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. Surr Back System
2. Speaker Setting
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Distance
5. X-Curve

The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are
using the receiver.
1 Press RECEIVER on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
2 Select ‘System Setup’ from the HOME
MENU.

Exit

Return

3
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is
expressed as a downwards slope in decibels
per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to
a maximum of –3.0dB/oct). Use the following
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
Room size (ft2) ≤400 ≤550 ≤650 ≤800 ≤2200 ≤12000
X-Curve
(dB/oct)

–0.5

–1.0

–1.5

–2.0

–2.5

–3.0

• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will
be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.
3

When you’re finished, press RETURN.

Select ‘Other Setup’, then press ENTER.
4.SystemSetup
A/V RECEIVER
a.Manual SP Setup
b. Input Setup
c. OSD Language
d. Other Setup

4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
Return
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup

Exit

Return

4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
want to adjust these settings in order:
• KURO LINK Setup – Synchronizes this
receiver with your Pioneer component
supporting KURO LINK (see KURO LINK
Setup on page 62).
• Multi Ch In Setup – Specifies the optional
settings for a multi-channel input (page 99).
• ZONE Audio Setup – Specifies the volume
setting for a MULTI-ZONE setup (page 99).
• Power ON Level Setup – Specifies the
volume level set when the power is turned
on (page 100).
• Volume Limit Setup – Limits the
maximum volume (page 100).

98
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 99 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

• Remote Control Mode Setup – Sets this
receiver’s remote control mode (page 101).
• Flicker Reduction – Adjusts the way the
GUI screen looks (page 101).
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each
setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after
each screen.

3 Select the ‘Video Input’ setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an
input function, you can display the video
images of other input functions. The video
input can be selected from the following: DVD,
TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO, OFF.
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
SW Input Gain
Video Input

:
:

+10dB
DVD

Multi Channel Input Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a
multi-channel input. Also, when the multichannel input is selected as an input function,
you can display the video images of other input
functions. In the Multi Channel Input Setup,
you can assign a video input to the multichannel input.
1 Select ‘Multi Ch In Setup’ from the Other
Setup menu.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup

Exit

Finish

4 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.

ZONE Audio Setup
If you’ve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 69),
you may need to specify your volume setting.
1 Select ‘ZONE Audio Setup’ from the
Other Setup menu.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER

Exit

1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup

Return

2 Select the ‘SW Input Gain’ setting you
want.
• 0dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer at
the level originally recorded on the source.

4d3.ZONE Audio Setup
A/V RECEIVER

ZONE 2 Volume Level :

Exit

Variable

Return

• +10dB – Outputs sound of the subwoofer
at the level increased by 10 dB.
Exit

Finish

4d2.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
SW Input Gain
Video Input

Exit

:
:

0dB
DVD

Finish

Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2.1
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve
connected a power amplifier in the sub
room (this receiver is simply being used as
a pre-amp) and you will be using this
receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.

Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 94, you won’t be able to change the volume level.

99
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 100 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected
a fully integrated amplifier (such as
another Pioneer VSX receiver) in the sub
room and want to use that receiver’s
volume controls.
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from
this receiver at maximum volume, so make
sure the volume is quite low in the sub zone at
first, and then experiment to find the correct
level.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Volume Limit Setup
Use this function to limit the maximum
volume. The volume cannot be increased
above the level set here, even by operating
MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the
front panel).
1 Select ‘Volume Limit Setup’ from the
Other Setup menu.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER

Power ON Level Setup

1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup

The volume can be set so that it is always set to
the same level when the receiver’s power is
turned on.

4d5.Volume Limit Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Volume Limit
Exit

1 Select ‘Power ON Level Setup’ from the
Other Setup menu.

OFF
Return

4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup

Exit

4d4.Power ON Level Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Power ON Level
Exit

LAST

Finish

Select the Volume Limit setting you want.
• OFF – The maximum volume is not limited.
• -20.0dB/-10.0dB/0.0dB – The maximum
volume is limited to the value set here.

Return

3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Exit

Finish

2 Select the Power ON Level setting you
want.
• LAST – When the power is turned on, the
volume is set to the same level as when the
power was last turned off.
• “---” – When the power is turned on, the
volume is set to minimum level.
• -80.0dB to +12.0dB – Specify the volume to
be set when the power is turned, in steps of
0.5 dB.
It is not possible to set a volume level greater
than the value specified at Volume Limit Setup.

100
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 101 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

The system and the other setup

Remote Control Mode Setup
• Default setting: 1

Flicker Reduction Setup
• Default setting: 4

This sets this receiver’s remote control mode to
prevent erroneous operation when multiple
units of the receiver are being used.1
1 Select ‘Remote Control Mode Setup’
from the Other Setup menu.

The GUI screen’s resolution can be increased.
If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try
changing this setting. Note that the resolution
in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it
has no influence on the video output.
1 Select ‘Flicker Reduction Setup’ from the
Other Setup menu.

4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER

4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Remote Control Mode :
Exit

1
Return

1. KURO LINK Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup

4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Flicker Reduction :
Exit

4
Return

Exit

Cancel

2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting
you want.
3 Select “OK” to change the remote control
mode.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen to
change the remote control’s setting.
See Operating multiple receivers on page 73.

Exit

Finish

2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you
want.
3 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.

5 When you’re finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.

Note
1 If you change this receiver’s setting, also change the setting on the remote control.

101
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 102 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Chapter 12:

Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is
something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in
another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the
trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer
authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity
disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating
conditions.

Power
Symptom

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.

Power cannot be turned off.
(ZONE 2 ON is displayed.)

• Set the remote control’s MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2,
then press  RECEIVER to switch the Zone 2 off.

The receiver suddenly
switches off or the PHASE
CONTROL indicator blinks.

• Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel
or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are
no stray strands.
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call
a Pioneer authorized independent service company.

During loud playback the
• Turn down the volume.
power suddenly switches off. • Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on
page 82.
• Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press  STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use
TUNE +/– to select D.SAFETY OFF, and then use PRESET +/– to select 1 or
2 (select D.SAFETY OFF to deactivate this feature). If the power switches
off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some
features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond
when the buttons are
pressed.

102
En

• Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 103 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Symptom

Remedy

AMP ERR blinks in the
display, then the power
automatically switches off.
The ADVANCED MCACC
blinks and the power does
not turn on.

• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver
on. Contact a Pioneer authorized independent service company for help.

Power indicator flashes and
power turns off.

• There is a problem with the receiver’s power unit or fan. Try turning on the
power after 1 minute. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged.
Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent
service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is turned on.)

AMP OVERHEAT and the
• Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back
power indicator flash and the on.
power turns off.
• Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
The Receiver suddenly power • The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a
off or the blue indicator at the Pioneer authorized independent service company.
center of the receiver flashes.

No sound
Symptom

Remedy

No sound is output when an
input function is selected.
No sound output from the
front speakers.

• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press
SPEAKERS).
• Make sure the correct input function is selected.
• Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
• Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that
when PCM is selected, you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting
your equipment on page 14).
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers
on page 18).

No sound from the surround • Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance
or center speakers.
mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening
in surround sound on page 53).
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker
Setting on page 95).
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 96).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
No sound from surround
back speakers.

• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see
Speaker Setting on page 95).
• Make sure surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON (see Using
surround back channel processing on page 56).
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1
compatibility, then with surround back channel processing set to SBch Auto,
there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case, set to
SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 56).

103
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 104 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Symptom

Remedy

No sound from surround
back speakers.
(Continued)

• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround
back channel processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected
(see Listening in surround sound on page 53).
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to
the left channel speaker terminal.

No sound from subwoofer.

• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume
turned up.
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on
page 95).
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the
characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 95).
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change
your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE /
Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 95).
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see
Setting the Audio options on page 64).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 96).

No sound from one speaker. • Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 96).
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on
page 95).
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced
effect listening mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see
Listening in surround sound on page 53).
Sound is produced from
analog components, but not
from digital ones (DVD, LD,
CD-ROM, etc.).

• Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
signal on page 58).
• Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the
component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
turned down.
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any
other input function.

No sound is output or a noise • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
is output when Dolby Digital/ • Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS
DTS software is played back. signal output is set to On.
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
turned down.
No sound when using the
HOME MENU or STATUS
menu.

104
En

• If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting either
menu.
• If sound is muted in the sub zone (ZONE 2), it will be restored after exiting the
HOME MENU.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 105 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Other audio problems
Symptom

Remedy

Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or
there is considerable noise in
radio broadcasts.

For FM broadcasts
• Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and
secure to a wall, etc.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).
For AM broadcasts
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a
fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move
the AM antenna.

A multichannel DVD source • Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the
appears to be downmixed to multichannel analog inputs on page 42).
2 channels during playback.
Noise is output when
scanning a DTS CD.

• This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player
alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being
output. Lower the volume when scanning.

When playing a DTS format
LD there is audible noise on
the soundtrack.

• Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
signal on page 58).

Can’t record audio.

• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog
recording from an analog source.
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks
(see Connecting other audio components on page 29).

Subwoofer output is very low. • To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers
to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 95).
Everything seems to be set up • The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker
correctly, but the playback
terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the
sound is odd.
speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
The PHASE CONTROL
• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or
feature doesn’t seem to have the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE
an audible effect.
setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on the subwoofer, the
setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker
Distance on page 97).
Noise or hum can be heard • Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the
even when there is no sound same power source are not causing interference.
being input.
There seems to be a time lag • See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 to
between the speakers and
set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for
the output of the subwoofer. a delay in the subwoofer output).
The maximum volume
• Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Limit Setup on
available (shown in the front page 100).
panel display) is lower than
the +12dB maximum.

105
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 106 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Video
Symptom

Remedy

No image is output when an • Check the video connections of the source component (see page 28).
input is selected.
• For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another
component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on
page 67), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video
cable as you used to connect your video component.
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using
component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).
• Check the video output settings of the source component.
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not
be converted. If adjusting this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the Video
options on page 67) and/or the resolution settings on your component or
display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video
options on page 67) OFF.
Can’t record video.

• Check that the source is not copy-protected.
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the
same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video
source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.

Noisy, intermittent, or
distorted picture.

Settings

106
En

Symptom

Remedy

The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.

• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as
low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 39). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up
the surround sound manually (page 94).
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND
BACK L (Single) terminals.
• To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround
channel, not the surround back channel.
• Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
• If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:
– The speaker’s wiring (+ and –) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.
– Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse
Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this
happens, select GO NEXT and continue.
– If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when
using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),
it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 107 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Symptom

Remedy

After using the Auto MCACC • There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an airSetup, the speaker size
conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use
setting is incorrect.
Auto MCACC Setup again.
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this
may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker
Setting on page 95, and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto
MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 78 if this is a recurring
problem.
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker • Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and
Distance setting (page 83)
negative (–) terminals are matched up properly).
properly.
The display shows KEY LOCK • With the receiver in standby, press  STANDBY/ON while holding down
ON when you try to make
SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
settings.
Most recent settings have
been erased.

• The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.

Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Symptom

Remedy

The EQ response displayed in
the graphical output
following calibration does not
appear entirely flat.

• There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting
ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to
compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little
or no adjustment needed.
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and
after measurements.

EQ adjustments made using • Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not
the Manual MCACC setup on display these adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments
page 82 do not appear to
are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
change the graphical output.
Lower frequency response
curves do not seem to have
been calibrated for SMALL
speakers.

• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not
change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration,
or do not output these frequencies.
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations,
no measurable sound is output for display.

107
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 108 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Display
Symptom

Remedy

The display is dark or off.

• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.

After making an adjustment
the display goes off.

• Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.

You can’t get DIGITAL to
display when using SIGNAL
SEL.

• Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are
assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input
function.

2 DIGITAL or DTS does not • These indicators does not light if playback is paused.
light when playing Dolby/DTS • Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source
software.
component.
When playing Dolby Digital • Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
or DTS sources, the receiver’s • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the
format indicators do not light. input signal on page 58).
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are
converted to PCM.
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or
DTS is selected.
When playing certain discs, • The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging
none of the receiver’s format for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
indicators light.

108
En

When playing a disc with the
listening mode set to Auto
Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or
Neo:6 appear on the receiver.

• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the
input signal on page 58).
• If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround
encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details
about the audio tracks available.

During playback of a
Surround EX or DTS-ES
source on the SBch AUTO
setting, EX or ES does not
appear, or the signal is not
properly processed.

• The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to
indicate it is 6.1 compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel
processing on page 56), then switch to the Standard EX listening mode (see
Listening in surround sound on page 53).

During playback of DVDAudio, the display shows
PCM.

• This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection.
This is not a malfunction.

The power turns off
automatically and some
indicator flashes, or some
indicator flashes and the
power does not turn on.

• See the Power section (page 102).

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 109 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Remote control
Symptom

Remedy

Cannot be remote controlled. • Set a 5-digit preset code corresponding to the receiver to be operated in the
remote control (see Operating multiple receivers on page 73).
• Check whether the receiver’s remote control mode is properly set (see
Remote Control Mode Setup on page 101).
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on
page 7).
• Be sure to operate within 7 m (23 feet) and a 30º angle of the remote sensor
on the front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 13).
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote
control.
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the
remote sensor.
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer
components with this unit’s sensor on page 32).
Other components can’t be
operated with the system
remote.

• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the
preset codes.
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset
codes.

HDMI
Symptom

Remedy

The HDMI indicator blinks
continuously.

• Check all the points below.

No picture or sound.

• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are
connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them
using the component or composite video jacks.
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not
work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect
using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly
to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact
the manufacturer for support.
• If video images do not appear on your TV or flat panel TV, try adjusting the
resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.
• If ‘NOT SUPPORT’ appears in the receiver’s display, try adjusting the
resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.
• While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate
connection for audio output.
• When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI
setting set to THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In
this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.
• To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI™
Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor
feature.

No picture.

• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 67).

109
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 110 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Symptom

Remedy

No sound, or sound suddenly • Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
ceases.
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
• If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection
for the audio.
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.
Noisy or distorted picture.

• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning,
for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units,
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),
then start playback again.
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly
to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact
the manufacturer for support.

HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.

• Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If
it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different
type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are
compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as
there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.

Amp-linked operation not
possible using KURO LINK
function.

• Check the HDMI connections.
• The cable may be damaged.
• Select ON for the KURO LINK setting (see KURO LINK Setup on page 62).
• Turn the TV’s power on before turning on this receiver’s power.
• Set the TV side KURO LINK setting to ON.

Important information regarding the HDMI connection
There are cases where you may not be able to
route HDMI signals through this receiver (this
depends on the HDMI-equipped component
you are connecting–check with the
manufacturer for HDMI compatibility
information).
If you aren’t receiving HDMI signals properly
through this receiver (from your component),
please try one of the following configurations
when connecting up.

Configuration A
Use component video cables to connect the
video output of your HDMI-equipped
component to the receiver’s component video
input. The receiver can then convert the analog
component video signal to a digital HDMI
signal for transmission to the display. For this
configuration, use the most convenient
connection (digital is recommended) for
sending audio to the receiver. See the
operating instructions for more on audio
connections.
Note
• The picture quality will change slightly
during conversion.

110
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 111 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Configuration B
Connect your HDMI-equipped component
directly to the display using an HDMI cable.
Then use the most convenient connection
(digital is recommended) for sending audio to
the receiver. See the operating instructions for
more on audio connections. Set the display
volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
Note
• If your display only has one HDMI terminal,
you can only receive HDMI video from the
connected component.

• Depending on the component, audio
output may be limited to the number of
channels available from the connected
display unit (for example audio output is
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with
stereo audio limitations).
• If you want to switch the input function,
you’ll have to switch functions on both the
receiver and your display unit.
• Since the sound is muted on the display
when using the HDMI connection, you
must adjust the volume on the display
every time you switch input functions.

USB interface
Symptoms

Causes

Remedies

The folders/files stored on The folders/files are currently stored Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
a USB memory device are in a region other than the FAT (File
not displayed.
Allocation Table) region.
The number of levels in a folder is
more than 8.

Limit the maximum number of levels in a
folder to 8 (page 45).

There are more than 30 000 folders/ Limit the maximum number of folders/files
files stored in a USB memory device. stored in a USB memory device to 30 000
(page 45).

A USB memory device is
not recognized.

The audio files are copyrighted.

Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB
memory device cannot be played back
(page 45).

The USB memory device does not
support the mass storage class
specifications.

Try using a USB memory device compatible
with the mass storage class specifications.
Note that there are cases where even the
audio files stored on a USB memory device
compatible with the mass storage class
specifications are not played back on this
receiver (page 45).
Connect the USB memory device and
switch on this receiver (page 35).

A USB hub is currently being used. This receiver does not support a USB hub
(page 45).
This receiver recognizes the USB
memory device as a fraud.

Switch off and on again this receiver.

111
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 112 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Symptoms

Causes

Remedies

A USB memory device is
connected and displayed,
but the audio files stored
on the USB memory
device cannot be played
back.

Some formats of a USB memory
device, including FAT 12, NTFS, and
HFS, cannot be played back on this
receiver.

Check whether the format of your USB
memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32.
Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS
formats cannot be played back on this
receiver (page 45).

The file format cannot be properly
played back on this receiver.

See the list of file formats that can be played
back on this receiver (page 48).

SIRIUS radio messages
Message

Cause

Antenna ERROR

Antenna is not properly connected. Check that the antenna cable is attached
securely.

Action

Check Sirius Tuner

SIRIUS Connect tuner is not
properly connected.

Acquiring Signal

The SIRIUS signal is too weak at the n/a
current location.

Subscription Updating

Unit is updating subscription.

Wait until the encryption code has been
updated.

Updating Channels

Unit is updating channels.

Wait until the encryption code has been
updated.

Invalid Channel

Selected channel is not available/
does not exist.

Select another channel.

Firmware Updating

The SIRIUS Connect tuner’s
firmware is being updated.

Wait for updating to finish.

Check that the 8 pin mini DIN cable and AC
Adapter are attached securely.

If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or
if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
• Press  STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
• If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold  STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over
10 seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may
be cleared.)

112
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 113 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main
surround sound formats you’ll find on DVDs,
satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and
video cassettes.

Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9
Pro) is a discrete surround format developed by
Microsoft Corporation.

Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
See www.dolby.com for more detailed
information.

Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.

About iPod

DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed
information.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent
#’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD
and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of
DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.

“Made for iPod” means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPod and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPhone and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a
trademark of Apple Inc.

113
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 114 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

About SIRIUS
SIRIUS and the SIRIUS-Ready logo are
registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite
Radio Inc.

About Neural – THX Surround

Neural-THX® Surround is taking surround sound to the
next level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the
rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround
sound in a format that is fully compatible with stereo from
various content sources. Neural-THX Surround enables 5.1,
6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies and digital
music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep
ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games.
Neural-THX® Digital Music™ is a new surround mode
specifically designed to enhance the playback of
compressed digital music content. It provides listeners
with an expanded sound stage and clean surround
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as
MP3s and Internet streams.
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official
surround sound format for TV sports broadcasting, 7.1
games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as leading
FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with this technology
being used by sound designers during content creation, as
well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX
Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the
original mix.

114
En

For additional information, please visit
www.neuralsurround.com.
This product is manufactured under license from Neural
Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation
hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable,
limited right of use to this product under USA and foreign
patent, patent pending and other technology or trademarks
owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. “Neural
Surround”, “Neural Audio”, “Neural” and “NRL” are
trademarks and logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation,
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in
some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 115 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the
Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 56) you have selected.

Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Auto Surround / ALC /
DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

Dolby Digital Surround

2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE

DTS Surround

Neo:6 CINEMA

Other stereo sources

Stereo playback

Analog sources

As above

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources

As above

Stereo playback

DVD-A sources

As above

SACD sources

As above

Dolby Digital Surround

2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE

DTS Surround

Neo:6 CINEMA

Other stereo sources

Stereo playback

Analog sources

As above

ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)

PCM sources

As above

Stereo playback

DVD-A sources

As above

SACD sources

As above

Auto Surround / ALC

PURE DIRECT / DIRECT

Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)

Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa

DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)

DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)

DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding)

DTS+Neo:6

Straight decoding

DTS-HD sources

Straight decoding

As above

Other 6.1/7.1 channel sources

As above

Other 5.1 channel sources

Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIEa

As above

Straight decoding

Input signal format
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected

Multichannel signal formats
Input signal format
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected

Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM

Straight decoding

SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding)

As above

Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources

As above

a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.

115
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 116 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Preset code list
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but
please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the
model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable
after assigning the proper preset code.

TV
General
Pioneer 10166, 10679,
11260, 11398
A-Mark 10047, 10054,
10160
A.R. Systems 10556
Accuscan 10047
Admiral 10047, 10054,
10017, 10051, 10093,
10463, 10180
Adventuri 10000
Agna 10150
Aiko 10092
Akai 10812, 11675, 10060,
10702, 10145, 10672
Alba 10037
Alfide 10672
Ambassador 10150
America Action 10180
American High 10000,
10060
Amstrad 10171
Amtron 10000, 10180
Anam 10180
AOC 10180, 11365
Apex Digital 10156, 10765,
10890, 11217
AR 10556
Audinac 10180
Audiovox 10451, 10180,
10092, 10623, 10802,
10875
Aventura 10171
Barco 10556
Baysonic 10180
Beaumark 10017, 10178
Bell & Howell 10054,
10154, 10093
BenQ 11574
Blue Sky 10556
Bradford 10180
Brockwood 10178
Broksonic 10236, 10463,
10180
Byd:sign 11309
Capehart 10017, 10178,
10092
Carver 10054
CCE 10037

116
En

Celebrity 10000
Celera 10765
Changhong 10156, 10765
Cineral 10451, 10092
Citek 10047
Citizen 10000, 10054,
10451, 10463, 10180,
10060, 10171, 10092
Clarion 10180
Classic 10092
Colortyme 10047, 10054,
10017, 10060, 10178
Commercial Solutions
11447, 10047
Conic 10178
Contec 10180
Craig 10180, 10171
Crosley 10000, 10054,
10180, 10171
Crown 10093, 10180, 10672
Crown Mustang 10672
Curtis Mathes 10000,
10047, 10054, 10154,
10051, 10451, 10093,
10180, 10060, 10702,
10178, 10145, 10166,
10037, 11147
CXC 10180
Daewoo 11755, 10451,
10178, 10092, 11661,
10623, 10661, 10672,
11756
Dayton 10092
Daytron 10178, 10092
Dell 11264, 11080, 11178,
11403
Denon 10145
Dumont 10017, 10180,
10178
Durabrand 10463, 10180,
10178, 10171
Dwin 10093
Dynex 11463, 12049
Eaton 10060
Electroband 10000
Electrograph 11755
Electrohome 10000, 10154,
10463, 10150, 10178
Element 11687
Emerald 10178

Emerson 10047, 10017,
10154, 10451, 10236,
10463, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10171, 10623,
11394
Envision 11365
ESA 10812, 10171
Ferguson 10625
Fisher 10000, 10054, 10154
Fortress 10093
Fujitsu 10809, 10683, 10853
Funai 10000, 10180, 10171,
11271
Futuretech 10180
Gateway 11755, 11756
GE 10000, 11447, 10047,
10051, 10451, 10060,
10178, 11147
Gemini 10047
GFM 10171
Gibralter 10000, 10017
GoldStar 10047, 10054,
10178, 10037
Goodmans 10037
Gradiente 10053
Granada 10037
Grundig 10037, 10672,
10683
Grundy 10180
Grunpy 10180
Haier 11748
Hallmark 10236, 10180,
10178
Hannspree 11351
Hanseatic 10556
Harley Davidson 10000,
10180, 10060, 10178
Harman/Kardon 10054
Harvard 10180
Havermy 10093
Heathkit 10017
Helios 10865
Hello Kitty 10451
Hewlett Packard 11494,
11101, 11502
Hitachi 10000, 11643,
10047, 10054, 10017,
10051, 11145, 10145,
11576
HP 11494, 11101, 11502

Hyundai 10865
Ima 10236, 10180, 10178
Infinity 10054
Innova 10037
Insignia 11423, 11564,
10171, 11517, 11710,
12049
Inteq 10017, 10145
JBL 10054
JCB 10000
Jinxing 10037, 10556
JVC 10054, 10053, 10160,
10650, 10731, 11253,
11601, 11633, 11774
Kamp 10017, 10180
KDS 11498, 11687
KEC 10180, 10060
Kenwood 10180
Kioto 10556
KLH 10156, 10180, 10765
Konka 10180
KTV 10463, 10180
Lark 10154
LG 11423, 10054, 10017,
11265, 10060, 10178,
10037, 10856, 11178,
11663, 11768
Lloyd's 10236, 10180
Loewe 10633
Logik 10236, 10180
Lumatron 10037, 10556
LXI 10000, 10047, 10054,
10017, 10154, 10156,
10051, 10093, 10060,
10053, 10178, 10171,
10166, 10037
MAG 11498, 11687
Magnasonic 10000, 10054,
10156, 10093, 10092
Magnavox 10000, 10250,
11454, 11866, 11755,
10047, 10054, 10154,
10051, 10180, 10060,
10171, 10092, 10802,
11254, 11365, 10037
Majestic 10017
Marantz 11454, 10054,
10037, 10556, 10704,
10855, 11398
Mark 10037

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 117 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Matsui 10037
Matsushita 10250, 10051,
10650
Maxent 11755, 11211,
11756, 11757
Megatron 10047, 10178,
10145
Memorex 10154, 10463,
10180, 10150, 10178,
10037
Mermaid 10037
MGA 10150, 10178
MGN Technology 10178
Micro Genius 10150
Midland 10047, 10017,
10051
Minato 10037, 10556
Mitsubishi 10154, 11250,
10093, 10150, 10178,
10160, 10836
Motorola 10054, 10051,
10093, 10150
MTC 10180, 10060, 10092
Multitech 10180
NAD 10156, 10178, 10166,
10037, 11156
National 10226
NEC 10047, 10178, 10704,
11398, 11704, 11797
NetTV 11755
Nikko 10178, 10092
Nikkodo 10178, 10092
Norcent 11365
NTC 10092
Nyon 10000
Olevia 11610, 11144,
11240, 11331
Onwa 10180
Optimus 10250, 10154,
10093, 10180, 10150,
10178, 10166, 10650
Optonica 10093
Orion 10017, 10236, 10463,
10180, 10178, 11463
Pace 10092
Pacific 10037, 10556
Panasonic 11480, 10250,
10054, 10156, 10051,
10236, 10226, 10650,
11310, 11636, 11650
Paxonic 10060
PCE 10156, 10060
Penney 10000, 10250,
10047, 10156, 10051,
10060, 10178, 10037
Petters 11523
Philco 10054, 10463, 10145,
10171, 11271, 11394
Philips 11454, 10054,
10171, 10037, 10556,
10605, 10690, 11254,
11506, 11744

Pilot 10051, 10060, 10178
Polaroid 11523, 10765,
10865, 11276, 11314,
11498, 11687, 11766
Portland 10451, 10092
Precision 10236, 10180
Prism 10250, 10051
Proscan 11447, 10047
Protec 10037
Proton 10178
Proview 11498, 11687
ProVision 10037, 10556
Pulsar 10017, 10092
Pulser 10178, 10092
Quartz 10150, 10178
Quasar 10250, 10051,
10650
R-Line 10037
Rabbit 10047
RadioShack 10047, 10154,
10180, 10150, 10178
RCA 10000, 11547, 11447,
10047, 10054, 10051,
10093, 10178, 10090,
10679, 11047, 11147,
11247, 11781, 12187
Realistic 10047, 10154,
10180, 10150, 10178
Revox 10037
Runco 10017, 10060, 11398
Sampo 11755, 10047,
11756
Samsung 10812, 10047,
10054, 10017, 10154,
10060, 10702, 10178,
12051, 11619, 11235,
11060, 10814, 10766,
10650, 10587, 10037
Sanky 10060
Sansui 10463, 10060, 10171
Sanyo 10000, 11755, 10047,
10054, 10154, 10463,
10171, 10037, 11142
Saville 10060
Sceptre 11217, 11360
Scotch 10178
Scott 10236, 10180, 10178
Sears 10000, 10047, 10054,
10017, 10154, 10156,
10051, 10093, 10060,
10053, 10178, 10171,
10166, 10037
Seleco 11351
Sharp 10818, 10054, 10093,
10180, 11393
Sheng Chia 10093
Shivaki 10178, 10037,
10556
Siemens 10145
Signature 10047, 10093
Simpson 10178
Singer 10060, 10092

Sky-North 10037
Solar Drape 10000
Sony 10810, 10000, 10017,
10154, 10150, 10053,
11651, 11685
Soundesign 10180, 10178
Spectravision 10156,
10178
Spectroniq 11498, 11687
Squareview 10171
SR2000 10154, 10171
SSS 10180
Starlite 10236, 10180
Superscan 10093, 10864
Supreme 10000
SV2000 10054
SVA 10587, 10865
Sylvania 10000, 11864,
10047, 10054, 10154,
10051, 10178, 10171,
10092, 10037, 11271,
11314, 11394
Symphonic 10000, 10180,
10178, 10171
Syntax 11610, 11144,
11240, 11331
Tandy 10093
Tatung 10000, 10051,
10037, 11101, 11756
Teac 10154, 10037
Technics 10250, 10054,
10051, 10226
Techwood 10250, 10051,
10060
Teknika 10054, 10463,
10180, 10150, 10060,
10178, 10092
Telecolor 10017
Telefunken 10702, 10625
Tevion 10037, 10556
Thomas 10047, 10178
Thomson 11447, 10047,
10625
TMK 10236, 10180, 10178
TNCi 10017
Tocom 10156
Toshiba 11524, 10154,
10156, 11256, 10150,
11265, 10060, 11145,
10145, 10166, 10650,
10845, 11156, 11656,
11704
Totevision 10051
Toyomenka 10178
Truetone 10250, 10051
TVS 10463
Ultra 10092
Universal 10047
Universum 10037
V 11755, 10864, 10885,
11756
Victor 10053, 10160

Vidikron 10054, 11398,
11633
Vidtech 10178
Viewsonic 11755, 10857,
10864, 10885
Viking 10060
Viore 10054
Vizio 11758, 11755, 10864,
10885, 11756
Wards 10000, 10047,
10054, 10017, 10154,
10051, 10093, 10236,
10178, 10166, 10037,
11156
Waycon 10156
Welton 10178
Westinghouse 10000,
11712, 10451, 10885,
10889, 10890, 11282,
11577
White Westinghouse
10451, 10236, 10463,
10623, 10889
World 10451, 10236, 10463,
10180
Wyse 11365
XR-1000 10154, 10180,
10171
Yamaha 10650
Zenith 10000, 10812,
11423, 10047, 10017,
10093, 10463, 11265,
10178, 11145, 10145,
10171, 10092, 10037,
10160

117
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 118 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

118
En

Additional information

Plasma Television

LCD

Pioneer 10679, 11260,
11398, 11633, 14000,
14001, 14003, 14004
Akai 10812, 11675
Daewoo 10661
Dell 11264
Electrograph 11755
ESA 10812
Fujitsu 10809, 10683, 10853
Funai 11271
Gateway 11755, 11756
Haier 11748
Helios 10865
Hewlett Packard 11502
Hitachi 11643
HP 11502
Insignia 11564
JVC 10731
LG 11423, 10178, 10856
Magnavox 11866
Marantz 10704, 11398
Maxent 11755, 11757
Mitsubishi 10836
NEC 11398, 11704
NetTV 11755
Panasonic 11480, 10250,
10650
Philips 10690, 11744
Polaroid 10865, 11276
Runco 11398
Sampo 11755
Samsung 10812, 12051
Sanyo 11142
Sony 10810, 10000
SVA 10865
Sylvania 11271, 11394
Tatung 11101, 11756
Toshiba 10650, 11704
Viewsonic 11755
Vizio 11758, 11756
Zenith 10178

Pioneer 11260
Akai 11675
AOC 11365
Apex Digital 10890, 11217
Audiovox 10180, 10802,
10875
Byd:sign 11309
Dell 11264, 11080, 11178
Dynex 12049
Element 11687
Emerson 11394
Envision 11365
Funai 10171
Haier 11748
Hannspree 11351
Hitachi 11643
Insignia 11564, 11517,
11710, 12049
JVC 11601, 11774
LG 11423, 10856, 11178,
11768
Magnavox 11866, 10802,
11365
Marantz 10855
Maxent 11755, 11211,
11757
Mitsubishi 11250
NEC 11797
Norcent 11365
Olevia 11610, 11144,
11240, 11331
Panasonic 11480, 10650
Petters 11523
Philips 11454, 11744
Polaroid 11523, 11276,
11498, 11687, 11766
RCA 10047, 11781, 12187
Sampo 11755
Samsung 10812, 10766,
10814, 12051
Sanyo 11142

Sceptre 11217, 11360
Sharp 10818, 10093
Sony 10810, 11685
Superscan 10864
SVA 10587
Sylvania 11864, 10171,
11271, 11314, 11394
Symphonic 10171
Syntax 11610, 11144,
11240, 11331
Toshiba 11524, 10845,
11656
Vidikron 11398
Viewsonic 10857, 10864,
10885
Vizio 11758, 10864, 10885,
11756
Westinghouse 11712,
10885, 10889, 10890,
11282, 11577
Wyse 11365
Zenith 11265

HDTV
Pioneer 10679
Mitsubishi 10150
Olevia 11610
Panasonic 10250, 10650
RCA 11447
Samsung 10812, 10702
Toshiba 11256

Rear Projection TV
Akai 10812, 10702
Apex Digital 10765
Hitachi 11145
JVC 11601
Mitsubishi 11250
Panasonic 10250
RCA 11447
Samsung 10812
Sony 10810
Toshiba 10156, 11656

TV/DVD Combination
Akai 11675
Dynex 12049
Emerson 11394
Insignia 12049
Magnavox 11866
Polaroid 11523, 11766
RCA 12187
Sylvania 11864, 11394
Toshiba 11524

TV/VCR Combination
America Action 10180
Audiovox 10180
Emerson 10236

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 119 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

DVR/VCR
General
Pioneer 20162, 20081,
20042, 20067, 20058,
22306, 22465, 22466,
22467
A-Mark 20037, 20000,
20278
ABS 21972
Accurian 20000
Admiral 20060, 20039
Adventura 20037, 20000
Aiko 20278
Aiwa 20037, 20000
Alba 20278
Alienware 21972
Allegro 20039
America Action 20278
American High 20035,
20081
Amstrad 20000
Anam National 20226
Astra 20035
Audio-Technica 20058
Audiovox 20037, 20278,
20038
Avis 20000
Bell & Howell 20035,
20039, 20000
Broksonic 20348, 21479
Calix 20037
Candle 20037, 20038
Canon 20035
Carver 20035, 20081
CCE 20278
Cineral 20278
Citizen 20035, 20037,
20000, 20278
Classic 20037
Colortyme 20060, 20035,
20045, 20278
Colt 20000
Craig 20037
Criterion 20000
Crosley 20035, 20081,
20000
Crown 20278
Curtis Mathes 20060,
20035, 20162, 20000,
20278
CyberPower 21972
Daewoo 20037, 20045,
20278
Daytron 20037, 20278
Dell 21972
Denon 20081, 20042
DirecTV 20739
Dual 20000
Durabrand 20039, 20038

Dynatech 20000
Electrohome 20060,
20037, 20000, 20043
Electrophonic 20037
Emerex 20032
Emerson 20037, 20000,
20043, 20278, 20348,
21479, 21593
Fisher 20039, 20000
Fuji 20035, 20033
Fujitsu 20000
Funai 20037, 20000, 20278,
21593
Garrard 20000
Gateway 21972
GE 20060, 20035, 20000,
20807
Gemini 20060
Genexxa 20037, 20000,
20278
GFM 21593
Go Video 20614
GoldStar 20035, 20037,
20039, 20000, 20278,
20038
Goodmans 20037, 20081,
20000, 20278
Gradiente 20000
Granada 20081, 20042
Grundig 20081, 20226
Harley Davidson 20000
Harman/Kardon 20081,
20038
Hewlett Packard 21972
HI-Q 20035, 20000
Hitachi 20035, 20037,
20045, 20000, 20042
Howard Computers 21972
HP 21972
Hughes Network
Systems 20739, 20042
Humax 20739
Hush 21972
Hytek 20000
iBUYPOWER 21972
Instant Replay 20035,
20226
Jensen 20067
JVC 20067, 20058, 21162
KEC 20037, 20278
Kenwood 20067, 20038
Kodak 20035, 20037
KTV 20000
LG 20037, 20038
Lifetec 20348
Linksys 21972
Lloyd's 20000, 20038

Loewe 20081
Logik 20000
Lumatron 20278
LXI 20037, 20000, 20042,
20067
Magnasonic 20037, 20000,
20278
Magnavox 20035, 20037,
20039, 20081, 20000,
20226, 20618, 21593
Marantz 20035, 20081,
20038
Marta 20037
Matsui 20037, 20348
Matsushita 20035, 20162,
20081, 21162
Media Center PC 21972
Medion 20348
MEI 20035
Memorex 20035, 20162,
20037, 20039, 20000,
20278, 20348, 21162
Metz 20037
MGA 20060, 20043
Microsoft 21972
Mind 21972
Minolta 20042
Mitsubishi 20060, 20000,
20042, 20067, 20043,
20807
Motorola 20035
MTC 20000
MTX 20000
Multitech 20039, 20000
NAD 20058
NEC 20067, 20038
Nikko 20037, 20278
Nikkodo 20037, 20278
Niveus Media 21972
Northgate 21972
Olympus 20035, 20162,
20226
Onkyo 20222
Optimus 21062, 20035,
20162, 20037, 20000,
20058, 21162
Orion 20000, 20278, 21479
Panama 20035
Panasonic 21062, 20035,
20162, 20000, 20225,
20226, 20614, 20616,
21162, 21244, 21293,
21562
Penney 20035, 20162,
20037, 20081, 20000,
20042, 20067, 20038
Pentax 20042
Philco 20035, 20081, 20000

Philips 20739, 20035,
20162, 20081, 20045,
20000, 20616, 20618
Pilot 20037
Polk Audio 20081
Portland 20278
Presidian 21593
Proscan 20060
Protec 20000
Pulsar 20039, 20278
Quartz 20035
Quasar 20035, 20162,
20226, 21162
RadioShack 20035, 20162,
20037, 20000, 21162
Radix 20037
Randex 20037
RCA 20060, 20035, 20045,
20000, 20042, 20058,
20807, 20880
Realistic 20035, 20162,
20037, 20000, 20278,
21162
ReplayTV 20614, 20616
Ricavision 21972
Runco 20039
Samsung 20739, 20060,
20045, 20000, 20038,
21014
Sanky 20039
Sansui 20000, 20067, 21479
Sanyo 20000
Scott 20045, 20043
Sears 20060, 20035, 20162,
20037, 20039, 20033,
20045, 20000, 20042,
20067, 20043, 20058
Sharp 20032, 20000, 20807
Shintom 20039, 20000
Siemens 20037
Signature 20060, 20035,
20037, 20000
Singer 20037
Sonic Blue 20614, 20616
Sony 20032, 20035, 20033,
20000, 20067, 20226,
20636, 21972
Soundmaster 20000
Stack 9 21972
STS 20042
SV2000 20000
SVA 20000
Sylvania 20035, 20081,
20000, 20043, 21593
Symphonic 20000, 21593
Systemax 21972
Tagar Systems 21972
Tandy 20000
Tashiko 20037

119
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 120 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Tatung 20081, 20000,
20067
Teac 20000, 20067
Technics 20035, 20162,
20037, 20000
Teknika 20035, 20037,
20000
Thomas 20000
Thomson 20060
Tisonic 20278
Tivo 20739, 20618, 20636,
21996
TMK 20000
TNIX 20037
Toshiba 20045, 20000,
20043, 21972, 21996
Tosonic 20278
Totevision 20037
Touch 21972
Trix 20037
Ultra 20045, 20278
Vector 20045

Vector Research 20038
Victor 20067
Video Concepts 20045
Videomagic 20037
Videosonic 20000
Viewsonic 21972
Villain 20000
Voodoo 21972
Wards 20060, 20035,
20037, 20081, 20033,
20045, 20000, 20042,
20043, 20038, 20058
White Westinghouse
20000, 20278
XR-1000 20035, 20000
Yamaha 20038
Zenith 20037, 20039,
20033, 20000, 20278,
21479
ZT Group 21972

PVR

Bush 30690
California Audio Labs
30490
Cambridge Soundworks
30690
Cat 30789
Celestial 31020
Centrex 30672, 31004
Cinea 30831
CineVision 30869, 31483
Citizen 30695, 31277,
31587, 32116
Clairtone 30571
Clatronic 30788
Coby 30778, 30852, 31086,
31107, 31321, 31351
Craig 30831
Creative 30503, 30539
CyberHome 30714, 30816,
30874, 31023, 31024,
31129, 31502, 31537
Daewoo 30784, 30714,
30770, 30869, 31172
Dansai 30770
Daytek 30872
Decca 30770
Denon 30490, 30634,
31634, 32258
Denver 30778
Diamond 30768
Digitor 31005
Digitrex 30672
Disney 30675, 31270
Dual 30675
Durabrand 30713, 31023

DVD2000 30521
Electrohome 32116
Elta 30690
Emerson 30591, 30675,
30821, 31268
Enterprise 30591
Entivo 30503, 30539
Enzer 30770
ESA 30821, 31268
Firstline 30651
Fisher 30670
Funai 30675, 31268, 31334
Gateway 31158
GE 30522, 30815
GFM 30675, 31268
Go Video 30573, 30744,
30741, 30783, 30869,
31044, 31075, 31158,
31304, 31483
GoldStar 30741, 30869
Goodmans 30790
Gradiente 30490, 30651
Grundig 30539, 30775
H & B 30850
Harman/Kardon 30582,
30702
Hello Kitty 30831
HiMAX 30843
Hitachi 30573, 30664,
31247, 31664, 31748
Hiteker 30672
Hoyo 30665
Humax 31500, 31588
Hyundai 30850

Pioneer 22306, 22465,
22466, 22467
ABS 21972
Alienware 21972
CyberPower 21972
Dell 21972
DirecTV 20739
Gateway 21972
Go Video 20614
Hewlett Packard 21972
Howard Computers 21972
HP 21972
Hughes Network
Systems 20739
Humax 20739
Hush 21972
iBUYPOWER 21972
Linksys 21972
Media Center PC 21972

Microsoft 21972
Mind 21972
Niveus Media 21972
Northgate 21972
Panasonic 20614, 20616
Philips 20739, 20618
RCA 20880
ReplayTV 20614, 20616
Samsung 20739
Sonic Blue 20614, 20616
Sony 20636, 21972
Stack 9 21972
Systemax 21972
Tagar Systems 21972
Tivo 20739, 20618, 20636
Toshiba 21972, 21996
Touch 21972
Viewsonic 21972
Voodoo 21972
ZT Group 21972

DVD
General
Pioneer 30525, 30571,
30142, 30631, 30632,
31460, 31512, 31571,
32442
3D LAB 30503, 30539
A-Trend 30714
Accurian 30675, 31416
Acoustic Solutions 30730
Adcom 31094
AEG 30788
Aiwa 30533, 30641
Akai 30695, 30770, 30899
Alba 30672
Alco 30790
Allegro 30869
Amphion Media Works
30872
Amstrad 30713
AMW 30872
Apex Digital 30533, 30672,
30794, 30796, 30797,
30830, 31004, 31020,
31056, 31061
Arrgo 31023
Audiovox 30790
Awa 30730
BBK 31224
Bel Canto Design 31571
Black Diamond 30713
Blue Parade 30571
Blue Sky 30695, 30713
Brandt 30651
Broksonic 30695, 30868

120
En

iLo 31348, 31472
Initial 31472
Insignia 30675, 31268,
32095, 32428
Integra 30571, 31769,
30627, 31634, 32147
IRT 30783
Jaton 30665
JBL 30702
JMB 30695
JSI 31423
JVC 30558, 30623, 30867,
31164, 31275, 31550
jWin 31051
Kawasaki 30790
Kenwood 30490, 30534
Kiss 30665, 30841
KLH 30790, 31020, 31149
Kloss 30533
Koss 30651, 31061, 31423
Kreisen 31421
Landel 30826
Lasonic 30627, 30789
Lecson 31533
LG 30591, 30741, 30869
Limit 30768
LiteOn 31058, 31158,
31416, 31656
Loewe 30511, 30741
Logix 30783
Magnasonic 30651, 30675

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 121 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Magnavox 30503, 30539,
30646, 30675, 30713,
30821, 31140, 31268,
31354, 31472, 31506
Marantz 30503, 30539,
30675
McIntosh 31533, 31273
Medion 30651
Memorex 30695, 30831,
31270
MiCO 30723, 30751
Microsoft 30522, 32083
Minato 30752
Mintek 31472
Mitsubishi 31521, 30521
Monyka 30665
Mustek 30730
Myryad 30894
NAD 30741
Naiko 30770
Nakamichi 31222
NEC 30785, 30869
Next Base 30826
Nintaus 31051
Norcent 30872, 31107
Onkyo 30503, 31769,
30627, 30612, 31612,
31627, 32147
Oppo 30575, 31224, 31525
Optimus 30571
Oritron 30651
Pacific 30768
Palsonic 30672, 30852
Panasonic 30490, 30503,
30571, 30632, 30703,
31010, 31011, 31362,
31462, 31490, 31579,
31641, 31762
Philco 30675, 30690, 30733
Philips 30503, 30539,
32056, 32084, 30646,
30585, 30675, 30713,
30854, 31158, 31260,
31267, 31340, 31354,
31506
PianoDisc 31024
Polaroid 31020, 31061,
31086
Polk Audio 30539
Portland 30770
Presidian 30675
Proceed 30672
Proscan 30522
ProVision 30778
Qwestar 30651
Radionette 30741
RadioShack 30571
Raite 30665
RCA 30522, 30571, 31769,
30790, 30822, 31022
Realistic 30571

Redstar 30763
Reoc 30752
Rio 30869
Rotel 30623, 31178
Rowa 31004
Saba 30651
Sampo 30752
Samsung 30490, 30573,
30744, 30199, 30820,
30899, 31044, 31075,
31748, 32329
Sansui 30695
Sanyo 30670, 30675, 30695,
31334
Schmartz 32367
Schneider 30783
Schwaiger 30752
Sensory Science 31158
Sharp 30630, 30675, 30752,
31256, 32250
Sherwood 30770
Shinsonic 30533
Singer 30751
Skyworth 30898, 32148
Slim Art 30784
SM Electronic 30690,
30730
Sonic Blue 30573, 30783,
30869
Sony 31533, 30533, 30864,
31033, 31069, 31070,
31431, 31516, 31536
Superscan 30821
Sylvania 30675, 30821,
31268, 32194
Symphonic 30675, 30821,
31268, 31334
TAG McLaren 30894
Tatung 30770
Teac 30571, 30759, 30790
Technics 30490, 30703
Technika 30770
Technosonic 30730
Tevion 30651
Theta Digital 30571
Thomson 30522, 30511,
30551
Tivo 31503, 31512, 31588
Tokai 30665
Toshiba 30503, 30573,
30539, 31769, 30695,
31045, 31154, 31503,
31510, 31515, 31588,
31608, 32277
Tredex 30843
Unimax 30770
United 30730, 30788
Universum 30591, 30779
Urban Concepts 30503,
30539
V 31064, 31226
Venturer 30790

Vizio 31064, 31226
Xbox 30522, 32083
Yamaha 30490, 30539,
30646, 30545, 30497,
30817
Yamakawa 30665, 30710,
30872
Zenith 30503, 30591,
30741, 30869
Zeus 30784

Blu-ray
Pioneer 30142, 32442
Denon 32258
Insignia 30675, 32428
Integra 32147
LG 30741
Magnavox 30675
Onkyo 32147
Panasonic 31641
Philips 32084
Sharp 32250
Sony 31516
Sylvania 30675

HD-DVD
Integra 31769
LG 30741
Microsoft 32083
Onkyo 31769
RCA 31769
Toshiba 31769, 31515
Xbox 32083

Magnavox 30646, 30675,
31506
Panasonic 30490, 31010,
31011, 31579
Philips 30646, 31340
Polaroid 31086
RCA 30522
Samsung 30490
Sanyo 30670
Sensory Science 31158
Sharp 30675
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070,
31431, 31536
Sylvania 30675
Toshiba 31510, 31588,
32277
Zenith 30741

DVD/PVR
Combination
Pioneer 30631, 31512
Humax 31500, 31588
LG 30741
Panasonic 30490, 31010,
31011
Philips 31340
RCA 30522
Sharp 31256
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070,
31536
Sylvania 30675
Tivo 31512
Toshiba 31503, 31510,
31588

DVD-R
Pioneer 30631, 31460,
31512
Accurian 30675, 31416
Apex Digital 31056
Citizen 32116
Coby 31086
CyberHome 31129, 31502
Electrohome 32116
Funai 30675, 31334
Gateway 31158
Go Video 30741, 31158,
31304
Humax 31588
iLo 31348
JVC 31164, 31275
Kreisen 31421
LG 30741
LiteOn 31158, 31416

121
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 122 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

DVD/VCR
Combination
Pioneer 31460
Accurian 30675
Allegro 30869
Apex Digital 31061
Broksonic 30695
CineVision 30869, 31483
Daewoo 30869

Emerson 30675
Funai 30675
GFM 30675
Go Video 30744, 30741,
30869, 31044, 31075,
31483
GoldStar 30741
Hitachi 30664
JVC 30867, 31164, 31550
LG 30741

LiteOn 31656
Magnavox 30675
Memorex 30695
Panasonic 31762
Philips 30675, 31267
Polaroid 31061
Presidian 30675
RCA 30522, 30822
Samsung 30820, 31044,
31075

Sansui 30695
Sanyo 30670
Sharp 30630
Sony 30864, 31033, 31069,
31070, 31431
Sylvania 30675
Symphonic 30675
Toshiba 30503
Zenith 30741, 30869

Magnavox 70157
Marantz 70626, 70029,
70157, 70180
Matsui 70157
MCS 70029
Memorex 70000, 70032,
70468
Micromega 70157
Miro 70000
Mission 70157
Modulaire 70000, 70032,
70087, 70180, 70468
Myryad 70157
NSM 70157
Onkyo 70868, 71327,
70101, 70102, 70138,
70381, 71322, 71323
Optimus 71063, 70000,
70032, 70037, 70087,
70468
Panasonic 70029, 70388,
70752
Penney 70029
Philips 70626, 70157
Polk Audio 70157
Proton 70157
QED 70157
Quad 70157
Quasar 70029

RadioShack 70000, 70032,
70180, 70468
RCA 70032, 70053, 70468
Realistic 70000, 70032,
70087, 70180, 70468
Revox 70157
Rotel 70157
SAE 70157
Sansui 70000, 70157
Sanyo 70000, 70087
Sharp 70037, 70180
Sherwood 70180
Sonic Frontiers 70157
Sony 70000, 70100, 71364
Sugden 70157
Sylvania 70157
Symphonic 70180
TAG McLaren 70157
Tandy 70032
Teac 70180
Technics 70029
Thule Audio 70157
Victor 70072
Wards 70032, 70157,
70053, 70087
Yamaha 70868, 70036,
71292
Yorx 70000

CD-R

CD
General
Pioneer 71063, 70032,
71087, 70468, 73468
Aiwa 70157
Arcam 70157
Audio Research 70157
Cairn 70157
California Audio Labs
70029
Cambridge Soundworks
70157
Carver 70157
Curtis Mathes 70032
Denon 70034, 70766
DKK 70000
DMX Electronics 70157
Fisher 70000
Genexxa 70032
Grundig 70157
Harman/Kardon 70100,
70157
Hitachi 70032
Inkel 70157, 70180
Integra 70101
JVC 70032, 70072
Kenwood 70626, 70000,
70029, 70028, 70037
Krell 70157
Linn 70157

122
En

Pioneer 71087
Kenwood 70626
Marantz 70626
Onkyo 71322, 71323
Philips 70626
RCA 70053
Sony 70000, 70100, 71364
Yamaha 71292

MD
Pioneer 71063
Onkyo 70868
Optimus 71063

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 123 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Satellite Set Top Box
General
Pioneer 00329, 01308
Akai 00200
Allsat 00200
Amstrad 00847, 01113
Asat 00200
Austar 00642, 00879, 01176
Bell ExpressVu 00775
British Sky Broadcasting
00847
Canal 00853
Chaparral 00216
Crossdigital 01109
DirecTV 01377, 00392,
00566, 00639, 01639,
01142, 00247, 00749,
01749, 00819, 01856,
01076, 01108, 00099,
01109, 01392, 01414,
01442, 01609, 01640
Dish Network System
00775, 01505, 01775
Dishpro 00775, 01505,
01775
Echostar 00775, 01505,
01775
Esat 00879
Expressvu 00775, 01775
Fortec Star 01821
Foxtel 00879

Funai 01377
GE 00566
GOI 00775, 01775
Gradiente 00887
Grundig 00173, 00847
Hitachi 00749, 00819
Houston 00775
HTS 00775, 01775
Hughes Network
Systems 01142, 00749,
01749, 01442
Humax 01781, 01790
Indovision 00887
Innova 00099
ISkyB 00887
JVC 00775, 00492, 01775
LG 01414
Magnavox 00722
Marantz 00200
Mitsubishi 00749
Netsat 00099, 00887
Nokia 00723
Omega 00887
Pace 00847, 00887, 01175
Panasat 00879
Panasonic 00247, 00701,
00847

Pansat 01807
Philips 00775, 01142,
00749, 01749, 01076,
00722, 00099, 00200,
00847, 01442
Proscan 00392, 00566
RadioShack 00775, 00566
RCA 00775, 00392, 00566,
01142, 00143, 01291,
01392, 01442
Sagem 00820, 01114
Samsung 01377, 01142,
01276, 01108, 01109,
01442, 01609
Siemens 00173
SKY 00099, 00847, 00887,
01175
Sony 00639, 01639, 00847,
01640
Star 00887
Televisa 00887
Thomson 00392, 00566
Tivo 01142, 01442
Toshiba 00749, 01749,
00790
TPS 00820
UltimateTV 01392, 01640
Uniden 00722
ViewSat 01232
Zenith 01856, 01810

SAT/PVR
Combination
Bell ExpressVu 00775
DirecTV 01377, 00392,
00639, 01142, 01076,
00099, 01392, 01442,
01640
Dish Network System
00775, 01505
Dishpro 00775, 01505
Echostar 00775, 01505
Expressvu 00775
Hughes Network
Systems 01142, 01442
Philips 01142, 01442
Proscan 00392
RCA 01392
Samsung 01442
Sony 00639, 01640
Tivo 01142, 01442
Zenith 01810

Cable Set Top Box
General
Pioneer 01877, 00877,
00144, 00533, 01021,
01782
A-Mark 00008, 00144
ABC 00237, 00008
Acorn 00237
Action 00237
Active 00237
Amino 01602, 01822
Archer 00237
BCC 00276
Century 00008
Cisco 01877, 00877, 01982
Comcast 01982
Digeo 02187
Director 00476
Fosgate 00276
GE 00144

General Instrument
00476, 00810, 00276
GoldStar 00144
Hitachi 00008
i3 Micro 01602
Insight 00476, 00810
Jerrold 00476, 00810,
00276
Macab 00817
Memorex 00000
Motorola 01376, 00476,
00810, 00276, 01106
Myrio 01602, 01822
Noos 00817
Nova Vision 00008
Novaplex 00008
Ono 01068
Pace 01877, 00877, 00237,
00008, 01060, 01068

Panasonic 00000, 00008,
00144, 00107, 01982
Paragon 00000, 00008,
00525
Penney 00000
Philips 01305, 00317
Pulsar 00000
Quasar 00000
RCA 01256
Regal 00276
Runco 00000
Samsung 00144
Scientific Atlanta 01877,
00877, 00237, 00000,
00008
Sejin 01602
Sony 01006
Sprucer 00144
Supercable 00276
Thomson 01256
Toshiba 00000

United Cable 00276
US Electronics 00276,
00008
Videoway 00000
Zenith 00000, 00525

123
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 124 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

Cable/PVR
Combination
Pioneer 01877
Amino 01822

Cisco 01877, 01982
Comcast 01982
Digeo 02187
General Instrument 00810
Jerrold 00810

Motorola 01376, 00810,
01106
Myrio 01822
Pace 01877, 00237
Panasonic 01982

RCA 01256
Scientific Atlanta 01877
Sony 01006
Supercable 00276
Thomson 01256

Onkyo 40135
Optimus 40027
Philips 40029
Polk Audio 40029
RCA 40027

Sansui 40029
Sony 40243
Wards 40027
Yamaha 40097

Niveus Media 01272
Northgate 01272
Panasonic 01120
Philco 01563
Ricavision 01272
Samsung 01190, 01490
Sharp 01010
Sony 01272, 01324
Stack 9 01272
SureWest 01481
Sylvania 01563
Systemax 01272

Tagar Systems 01272
Toshiba 01272
Touch 01272
Viewsonic 01272, 01329
Voodoo 01272
Xbox 02049
Zenith 01415
ZT Group 01272

Laser Disc Player
Pioneer 30241, 32447
Denon 30241
Magnavox 30241
Mitsubishi 30241

Cassette Deck
Pioneer 40027, 42446
Aiwa 40029
Carver 40029
Denon 40076
Grundig 40029

Harman/Kardon 40029
JVC 40244
Kenwood 40070
Magnavox 40029
Marantz 40029

Digital Tape
Pioneer 40019
Onkyo 40019

Video Accessory
Pioneer 01010
2Wire 02045
ABS 01272
Accurian 01653
ADB 02586
Alienware 01272
Amino 01481
AT&T 02045
CyberPower 01272
Epson 01563
Gateway 01272

124
En

Hewlett Packard 01272
Howard Computers 01272
HP 01272
Hush 01272
iBUYPOWER 01272
Insignia 01415
KoolConnect 01481
LG 01415
Linksys 01272
Magnavox 01563
Media Center PC 01272
Microsoft 02049, 01272
Mind 01272
Motorola 01998, 01363

12_additional_info.fm 125 ページ

２００９年１月８日 木曜日 午後７時６分

Additional information

Specifications
Amplifier section
Continuous average power output of 90
watts* per channel, min., at 8 ohms, from
20 Hz to 20 000 Hz with no more than
0.2 %** total harmonic distortion.
Front (stereo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 W + 90 W
Power output (1 kHz, 6 Ω, 0.05 %, 1 ch driven)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 W per channel
Guaranteed speaker impedance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ω to 8 Ω,
less than 8 Ω to 6 Ω (setting required)
* Measured pursuant to the Federal Trade Commission’s
Trade Regulation rule on Power Output Claims for
Amplifiers
** Measured by Audio Spectrum Analyzer

Audio Section
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 mV/47 kΩ
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 mV/2.2 kΩ
Signal-to-Noise Ratio
(IHF, short circuited, A network)
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB
Signal-to-Noise Ratio [EIA, at 1 W (1 kHz)]
LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 dB

Tuner Section
Frequency Range (FM) . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . 75 Ω unbalanced
Frequency Range (AM) . . . . 530 kHz to 1700 kHz
Antenna (AM). . . . . . . . Loop antenna (balanced)

Video Section
Signal level
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Component Video . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 Ω),
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Corresponding maximum resolution
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . 1080p (1125p)
(Video convert off)

Digital In/Out Section
HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)
HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA
USB terminal . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)
iPod terminal. . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)
SIRIUS antenna cable . . . . 8-pin mini DIN cable

Integrated control section
Control (SR) terminal . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Control (IR) terminal. . . Ø 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
IR signal. . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)

Miscellaneous
Power requirements. . . . . . . . . . AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 W
In standby . . . . . . . 0.5 W (KURO LINK OFF)
0.8 W (KURO LINK ON)
Dimensions
. . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 158 mm (H) x 349 mm (D)
(16 9/16 in. (W) x 6 1/4 in. (H) x 13 3/4 in. (D))
Weight (without package) . . . . 8.7 kg (19 lb 3 oz)

Furnished Parts Number
MCACC Setup microphone (APM7008) . . . . . .
Remote control unit (AXD7551(VSX-1019AH)/
AXD7552 (VSX-919AH)) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AA/IEC R6 dry cell batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iPod cable (ADE7129). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM wire antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
These operating instructions

1
1
2
1
1
1

Note
• Specifications and the design are subject
to possible modifications without notice,
due to improvements.

125
En

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 126 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

Additional information

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

Selecting fine audio equipment such as the unit
you’ve just purchased is only the start of your
musical enjoyment. Now it’s time to consider how
you can maximize the fun and excitement your
equipment offers. This manufacturer and the
Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group want you to get the most out of
your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that
lets the sound come through loud and clear without
annoying blaring or distortion-and, most importantly,
without affecting your sensitive hearing.
Sound can be deceiving. Over time your hearing
“comfort level” adapts to higher volumes of sound.
So what sounds “normal” can actually be loud and
harmful to your hearing. Guard against this by
setting your equipment at a safe level BEFORE your
hearing adapts.

Used wisely, your new sound equipment will
provide a lifetime of fun and enjoyment. Since
hearing damage from loud noise is often
undetectable until it is too late, this manufacturer
and the Electronic Industries Association’s
Consumer Electronics Group recommend you avoid
prolonged exposure to excessive noise. This list of
sound levels is included for your protection.
Decibel
Level Example
30
40
50
60
70
80

Quiet library, soft whispers
Living room, refrigerator, bedroom away from traffic
Light traffic, normal conversation, quiet office
Air conditioner at 20 feet, sewing machine
Vacuum cleaner, hair dryer, noisy restaurant
Average city traffic, garbage disposals, alarm clock
at two feet.

THE FOLLOWING NOISES CAN BE DANGEROUS
UNDER CONSTANT EXPOSURE

To establish a safe level:
• Start your volume control at a low setting.
• Slowly increase the sound until you can hear it
comfortably and clearly, and without distortion.

90 Subway, motorcycle, truck traffic, lawn mower
100 Garbage truck, chain saw, pneumatic drill
120 Rock band concert in front of speakers,
thunderclap
140 Gunshot blast, jet plane
180 Rocket launching pad

Once you have established a comfortable sound
level:
• Set the dial and leave it there.

Information courtesy of the Deafness Research Foundation.

Taking a minute to do this now will help to prevent
hearing damage or loss in the future. After all, we
want you listening for a lifetime.
S001_En

Cleaning the unit
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe
off dust and dirt.
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft
cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser
diluted five or six times with water, and
wrung out well, and then wipe again with a
dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide
sprays or other chemicals on or near this
unit, since these will corrode the surface.

126
En

This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by
NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark
of NEC Corporation

VSX-1019_KU.book Page 127 Thursday, January 8, 2009 12:01 PM

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

LIMITED WARRANTY
WARRANTY VALID ONLY IN COUNTRY OF PRODUCT PURCHASE
WARRANTY
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. (PUSA), and Pioneer Electronics Of Canada, Inc. (POC), warrant that products distributed by PUSA in the U.S.A., and by POC in Canada that fail to function
properly under normal use due to a manufacturing defect when installed and operated according to the owner’s manual enclosed with the unit will be repaired or replaced with a unit of comparable
value, at the option of PUSA or POC, without charge to you for parts or actual repair work. Parts supplied under this warranty may be new or rebuilt at the option of PUSA or POC.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY APPLIES TO THE ORIGINAL OR ANY SUBSEQUENT OWNER OF THIS PIONEER PRODUCT DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD PROVIDED THE
PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN AUTHORIZED PIONEER DISTRIBUTOR/DEALER IN THE U.S.A. OR CANADA. YOU WILL BE REQUIRED TO PROVIDE A SALES
RECEIPT OR OTHER VALID PROOF OF PURCHASE SHOWING THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE OR, IF RENTED, YOUR RENTAL CONTRACT SHOWING THE PLACE
AND DATE OF FIRST RENTAL. IN THE EVENT SERVICE IS REQUIRED, THE PRODUCT MUST BE DELIVERED WITHIN THE WARRANTY PERIOD, TRANSPORTATION PREPAID,
ONLY FROM WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE AS EXPLAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT. YOU WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF THE
PRODUCT. PUSA OR POC, AS APPROPRIATE, WILL PAY TO RETURN THE REPAIRED OR REPLACEMENT PRODUCT TO YOU WITHIN THE COUNTRY OF PURCHASE.

PRODUCT WARRANTY PERIOD
Home Audio and Video
.........................................................................................................................................................
Microphones, Headphones, Phono Cartridges and Styluses ................................................................................................

Parts

Labor

1 Year
90 Days

Shorter limited warranty periods apply to some models. Please refer to the limited warranty document enclosed with the product for a definitive statement of the warranty period.
The warranty period for retail customers who rent the product commences upon the date product is first put into use (a) during the rental period or (b) retail sale, whichever occurs first.

WHAT IS NOT COVERED
IF THIS PRODUCT WAS PURCHASED FROM AN UNAUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR, THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND THIS PRODUCT IS SOLD STRICTLY “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS".
PIONEER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL AND/OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.
PIONEER DOES NOT WARRANT ANY PRODUCT LISTED ABOVE WHEN IT IS USED IN A TRADE OR BUSINESS OR IN ANY INDUSTRIAL OR COMMERCIAL APPLICATION.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY IF THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN SUBJECTED TO POWER IN EXCESS OF ITS PUBLISHED POWER RATING.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER TELEVISION OR DISPLAY SCREENS DAMAGED BY STATIC, NON-MOVING, IMAGES APPLIED FOR LENGTHY PERIODS (BURN-IN).
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE CABINET OR ANY APPEARANCE ITEM, USER ATTACHED ANTENNA, ANY DAMAGE TO RECORDS OR RECORDING TAPES OR DISCS, ANY
DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT RESULTING FROM ALTERATIONS, MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY PIONEER, ACCIDENT, MISUSE OR ABUSE, DAMAGE DUE TO
LIGHTNINGORTOPOWERSURGES,SUBSEQUENTDAMAGEFROMLEAKING,DAMAGEFROMINOPERATIVEBATTERIES,ORTHEUSEOFBATTERIESNOTCONFORMINGTOTHOSE
SPECIFIED IN THE OWNER’S MANUAL.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER THE COST OF PARTS OR LABOR WHICH WOULD BE OTHERWISE PROVIDED WITHOUT CHARGE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OBTAINED FROM
ANYSOURCEOTHERTHANAPIONEERAUTHORIZEDSERVICECOMPANYOROTHERDESIGNATEDLOCATION. THISWARRANTYDOESNOTCOVERDEFECTSORDAMAGECAUSED
BY THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED PARTS OR LABOR OR FROM IMPROPER MAINTENANCE.
ALTERED, DEFACED, OR REMOVED SERIAL NUMBERS VOID THIS ENTIRE WARRANTY

NO OTHER WARRANTIES
IN THE U.S.A. - PIONEER LIMITS ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TO A PERIOD NOT TO EXCEED THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THE
WARRANTY PERIOD. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS AND SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSIONS
OR LIMITATIONS OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES
YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
IN CANADA - EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES, OBLIGATIONS OR CONDITIONS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY
OR OTHERWISE, APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT.

TO OBTAIN SERVICE
PUSA and POC have appointed a number of Authorized Service Companies throughout the U.S.A. and Canada should your product require service. To receive warranty service
you need to present your sales receipt or, if rented, your rental contract showing place and date of original owner’s transaction. If shipping the unit you will need to package
it carefully and send it, transportation prepaid by a traceable, insured method, to an Authorized Service Company. Package the product using adequate padding material to
prevent damage in transit. The original container is ideal for this purpose. Include your name, address and telephone number where you can be reached during business hours.
On all complaints and concerns in the U.S.A. call Customer Support at 1-800-421-1404, or, in Canada, call Customer Satisfaction at 1-877-283-5901.

IN THE U.S.A.
For hook-up and operation of your unit or to locate an
Authorized Service Company, please call or write:
PIONEER ELECTRONICS SERVICE, INC.
P.O. BOX 1760
LONG BEACH, CALIFORNIA 90801
1-800-421-1404
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com

IN CANADA
For additional information on this warranty,
please call or write:
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION GROUP
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 ALLSTATE PARKWAY
MARKHAM, ON L3R 0P2
(905) 479-4411
1-877-283-5901
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca

DISPUTE RESOLUTION
IN THE U.S.A. - Following our response to any initial request to Customer Support, should a dispute arise between you and Pioneer, Pioneer makes available its Complaint
Resolution Program to resolve the dispute. The Complaint Resolution Program is available to you without charge. You are required to use the Complaint Resolution Program
before you exercise any rights under, or seek any remedies, created by Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty-Federal Trade Commission Improvement Act, 15 U.S.C. 2301 et seq.
To use the Complaint Resolution Program call 1-800-421-1404 and explain to the customer service representative the problem you are experiencing, steps you have taken
to have the product repaired during the warranty period and the name of the authorized Distributor/Dealer from whom the Pioneer product was purchased. After the complaint
has been explained to the representative, a resolution number will be issued. Within 40 days of receiving your complaint, Pioneer will investigate the dispute and will either:
(1) respond to your complaint in writing informing you what action Pioneer will take, and in what time period, to resolve the dispute; or (2) respond to your complaint in writing
informing you why it will not take any action.
IN CANADA - Call the Customer Satisfaction Manager at (905) 946-7446 to discuss your complaint and to obtain a prompt resolution.

RECORD THE PLACE AND DATE OF PURCHASE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE
Model No. ____________________________________________ Serial No. _________________________________________ Purchase Date _______________________
Purchased From _______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
KEEP THIS INFORMATION AND YOUR SALES RECEIPT IN A SAFE PLACE

12_additional_info.fm 128 ページ

２００９年１月８日 木曜日 午後７時４５分

Should this product require service in the U.S.A. and you wish to locate the nearest Pioneer
Authorized Independent Service Company, or if you wish to purchase replacement parts,
operating instructions, service manuals, or accessories, please call the number shown
below.
1–800–421–1404
Please do not ship your product to Pioneer without first calling the Customer Support at the
above listed number for assistance.
Pioneer Electronics Service, Inc.
P.O. BOX 1760, Long Beach,
CA 90801-1760, U.S.A.
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Should this product require service in Canada, please contact a Pioneer Canadian
Authorized Dealer to locate the nearest Pioneer Authorized Service Company in Canada.
Alternatively, please contact the Customer Satisfaction Department at the following address:
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
Customer Satisfaction Department
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
For warranty information please see the Limited Warranty sheet included with your product.
Si ce produit doit être réparé au Canada, veuillez vous adresser à un distributeur autorisé
Pioneer du Canada pour obtenir le nom du Centre de Service Autorisé Pioneer le plus près
de chez-vous. Vous pouvez aussi contacter le Service à la clientèle de Pioneer:
Pioneer Électroniques du Canada, Inc.
Service Clientèle
300, Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
Pour obtenir des renseignements sur la garantie, veuillez vous reporter au feuillet sur la
garantie restreinte qui accompagne le produit.
S018_C_EF

PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411

PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_B_En

Printed in

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseThumbs
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2009:01:08 11:32:46Z
Modify Date                     : 2009:01:27 10:02:21+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:01:27 10:02:21+09:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.2
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : PMC
Title                           : XRB3109A
Description                     : Linked
Document ID                     : uuid:570d8b9a-b16b-4ff8-875a-11729f9946bd
Instance ID                     : uuid:3ee8790e-299b-418f-8461-c0bc5b994edb
Page Count                      : 128
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Subject                         : Linked
Author                          : PMC

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Pioneer Vsx 919Ah K Users Manual XRB3109A

If not then VSX-1019AH-K_OperatingInstructions0128 Manual: ://www.pioneerelectronics.com/ephox/StaticFiles/Manuals/Home/VSX-1019AH-K_OperatingInstructions0128

VSX-919AH-K to the manual 1f1f3ab9-2aa9-4563-9a74-93f138720ae6

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation